WO2011105518A1 - Photopolymerization initiator, photocurable composition, pattern formation method, colour filter, lcd device, and manufacturing method for photopolymerization initiator - Google Patents

Photopolymerization initiator, photocurable composition, pattern formation method, colour filter, lcd device, and manufacturing method for photopolymerization initiator Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2011105518A1
WO2011105518A1 PCT/JP2011/054193 JP2011054193W WO2011105518A1 WO 2011105518 A1 WO2011105518 A1 WO 2011105518A1 JP 2011054193 W JP2011054193 W JP 2011054193W WO 2011105518 A1 WO2011105518 A1 WO 2011105518A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
substituted
carbon atoms
unsubstituted
ring
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2011/054193
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
寛子 天野
寛 酒井
Original Assignee
大日本印刷株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 大日本印刷株式会社 filed Critical 大日本印刷株式会社
Priority to JP2012501867A priority Critical patent/JP5626332B2/en
Publication of WO2011105518A1 publication Critical patent/WO2011105518A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F2/00Processes of polymerisation
    • C08F2/46Polymerisation initiated by wave energy or particle radiation
    • C08F2/48Polymerisation initiated by wave energy or particle radiation by ultraviolet or visible light
    • C08F2/50Polymerisation initiated by wave energy or particle radiation by ultraviolet or visible light with sensitising agents
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D209/00Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings, condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D209/56Ring systems containing three or more rings
    • C07D209/80[b, c]- or [b, d]-condensed
    • C07D209/82Carbazoles; Hydrogenated carbazoles
    • C07D209/86Carbazoles; Hydrogenated carbazoles with only hydrogen atoms, hydrocarbon or substituted hydrocarbon radicals, directly attached to carbon atoms of the ring system
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/06Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing only aliphatic carbon atoms
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D405/00Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D405/02Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D405/06Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing only aliphatic carbon atoms
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D405/00Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D405/02Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D405/12Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D409/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D409/02Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings
    • C07D409/06Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing only aliphatic carbon atoms
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D411/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having oxygen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D411/02Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having oxygen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings
    • C07D411/06Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having oxygen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing only aliphatic carbon atoms
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/0005Production of optical devices or components in so far as characterised by the lithographic processes or materials used therefor
    • G03F7/0007Filters, e.g. additive colour filters; Components for display devices
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/027Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds
    • G03F7/028Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds with photosensitivity-increasing substances, e.g. photoinitiators
    • G03F7/031Organic compounds not covered by group G03F7/029
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/09Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers
    • G03F7/105Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers having substances, e.g. indicators, for forming visible images
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • G02B5/201Filters in the form of arrays

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a photopolymerization initiator, a photocurable composition, a pattern formation method using the composition, a color filter using the composition, a liquid crystal display device having the color filter, and production of a photopolymerization initiator.
  • a photopolymerization initiator More specifically, a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, an ether bond and / or an ester bond and a liquid compound at 25 ° C.
  • a photopolymerization initiator that is free from contamination or equipment contamination, and that provides a photocurable composition that provides good resolution, developability, deep curability, and adhesion to a substrate, and the photopolymerization initiation Curable composition containing an agent, a pattern formation method using the photocurable composition, a color filter using the photocurable composition, a liquid crystal display device having the color filter, and the light Process for the preparation of initiator.
  • the photocurable resin composition contains, for example, a binder resin, a polymerizable monomer, and a photopolymerization initiator, and can be polymerized and cured by irradiation with light (electromagnetic waves including radiation such as particle beams). , Photocurable inks, photosensitive printing plates, color filters, various photoresists, and the like.
  • light having a wavelength of 450 nm or less is often used from the viewpoint of easy handling and sensitivity, and the light source has wavelengths of 365 nm, 405 nm, High pressure mercury lamps having strong emission at a wavelength of 436 nm and excimer lasers such as KrF and ArF are used.
  • the application of electromagnetic waves or radiation having a short wavelength such as an electron beam or EUV (Extreme Ultra Violet) has been studied. Curing with light is more energy-saving than heat-curing and can be cured in a desired pattern by irradiating it through a photomask.
  • Color filters using the pigment dispersion method are usually exposed to light using a photomask after the photocurable composition is coated on a glass substrate in a pigment dispersion obtained by dispersing the pigment with a dispersant or the like, dried. A colored pattern is formed by developing, and the pattern is fixed by heating to form a pixel. These steps are repeated for each color to form a color filter.
  • the photocurable composition used for image formation of such a color filter is required to have characteristics such as sufficient resolution, adhesion to a substrate and low development residue.
  • pixels with high color density and black matrix resists with high optical density which themselves function as light-shielding layers, have been used, and the inclusion of black pigments such as colored pigments and carbon black in photocurable compositions.
  • the amount increases and the light transmittance of the photocurable composition tends to decrease.
  • the light from the exposure light source does not reach the deep part of the photo-curable resin coating film, and there is a problem that the resolution, adhesion to the substrate, developability, etc. are deteriorated. The accuracy and further reliability required for the above are reduced.
  • the glass substrate on which the color filter is formed is getting larger year by year, and since the large area exposure is performed, the exposure illuminance tends to decrease and the exposure time is shortened for further productivity improvement. Therefore, a more sensitive photopolymerization initiator is required. Therefore, as a method for obtaining a photocurable composition that can achieve high sensitivity and high resolution, it has been proposed to use an oxime ester compound as a photopolymerization initiator (see Patent Documents 1 to 5).
  • Japanese Patent No. 3860170 JP 2006-036750 A Japanese Patent No. 3993725 JP 2010-037542 A Korean Public Patent No. 2009-0046108
  • an object of the present invention is to provide a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond (particularly a compound having a (meth) acryloyloxy group), an ether bond and / or an ester bond in a photocurable composition at 25 ° C.
  • High compatibility with compounds and high solubility in solvents (including compounds that are ether-bonded and / or ester-bonded and liquid at 25 ° C.) and sensitivity to light (especially light having a short wavelength of 450 nm or less) Is a photopolymerization initiator that is high and has no contamination of polymer or equipment due to decomposition products generated by light at the time of exposure, and has good resolution, developability, deep curability and adhesion to the substrate.
  • the photoinitiator which can provide a curable composition. Further, a photocurable composition containing the photopolymerization initiator, a pattern forming method using the photocurable composition, a color filter using the photocurable composition, and a liquid crystal display device having the color filter Is to provide. Furthermore, it is providing the method of manufacturing the said photoinitiator simply at low cost.
  • the present inventor can solve the above-mentioned problems as long as it is a photopolymerization initiator having a specific structure represented by the general formula (Ia) described later. I found. That is, the present invention relates to the following [1] to [23]. [1] A photopolymerization initiator represented by the following general formula (I).
  • R 1 to R 11 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted Or an unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 ring atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, a hydroxyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or Unsubstituted alkenyloxy group having 2-20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkanoyl group having 1-20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkenoyl group having 2-20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted ring carbon atoms 6 .R 3 that an aryl group
  • Ar represents a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms or a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl group having 5 to 14 ring atoms.
  • W represents a single bond or an oxygen atom.
  • Z represents a single bond, an oxygen atom, or> NR 3 ′ (R 3 ′ represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or R 3 ′ is connected to R 3 together with a nitrogen atom. Forming a ring).
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 10. When n is an integer of 2 to 10, the plurality of R 4 and R 5 may be the same or different.
  • R 1 to R 11 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted Or an unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 ring atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, a hydroxyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or Unsubstituted alkenyloxy group having 2-20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkanoyl group having 1-20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkenoyl group having 2-20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted ring carbon atoms 6 .R 3 that an aryl group
  • Ar represents a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms or a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl group having 5 to 14 ring atoms.
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 10. When n is an integer of 2 to 10, the plurality of R 4 and R 5 may be the same or different.
  • R 1 , R 2 and R 3 are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms
  • n is 2
  • R 4 and R 5 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms
  • Ar is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms.
  • R 1 , R 2 and R 3 are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, n is 2, Each of R 4 and R 5 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and Ar represents a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl group having 5 to 14 ring atoms.
  • [5] The photopolymerization initiator according to the above [3] or [4], which has a molecular weight of 515 or less.
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and R 3 is a substituted or unsubstituted carbon number.
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and R 3 is 3 to 6 ring atoms.
  • the photopolymerization initiator according to the above [6] or [7] which has a molecular weight of 550 or less.
  • the photopolymerization initiator according to [1] which is represented by the following general formula (Ib).
  • R 1 to R 11 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted Or an unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 ring atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, a hydroxyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or Unsubstituted alkenyloxy group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkanoyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkenoyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted ring forming carbon number A 6 to 14 aryl group
  • Ar represents a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms or a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl group having 5 to 14 ring atoms.
  • W represents a single bond or an oxygen atom.
  • Z represents a single bond, an oxygen atom, or> NR 3 ′ (R 3 ′ represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or R 3 ′ is connected to R 3 together with a nitrogen atom. Forming a ring).
  • R 1 and R 3 are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, W is an oxygen atom, and Z is a single atom.
  • R 2 represents —OCOR 13 (R 13 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms) or —COOR 20 (R 20 represents carbon The alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or the aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms).
  • R 1 and R 3 are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, W is a single bond, and Z is>
  • NR 3 ′ R 3 ′ is as defined above
  • Ar is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms. Initiator.
  • R 2 represents —OCOR 13 (R 13 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms) or —COOR 20 (R 20 represents carbon
  • R 12 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an ester group having an ester group represented by: Initiator.
  • a photocurable composition comprising a binder resin and / or a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, and the photopolymerization initiator according to any one of [1] to [13].
  • the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond at least one compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond having an ether bond and / or an ester bond is used, and the solvent is only 10% by mass or less of the total amount of the photocurable composition.
  • a liquid crystal display device comprising the color filter according to [20], a counter substrate, and a liquid crystal layer formed between the color filter and the counter substrate.
  • a pattern forming method comprising applying the photocurable composition according to any one of [16] to [18] to a substrate, drying the substrate, exposing the substrate using a photomask, and then developing the pattern. .
  • R 6 to R 11 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted Or an unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 ring atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, a hydroxyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or Unsubstituted alkenyloxy group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkanoyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkenoyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted ring forming carbon number Represents a 6 to 14
  • R 3 , R 4 ′ and R 5 ′ are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted carbon number 2 to 20 Alkenyl group, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 ring atoms, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, hydroxyl group, substituted or unsubstituted 1 to 20 carbon atoms Alkoxy group, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyloxy group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkanoyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkenoyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted .R 3 showing a heterocyclic group having ring carbon atoms
  • X represents a halogen atom or —OC ( ⁇ O) Ar
  • X ′ represents a halogen atom or —OC ( ⁇ O) R 2
  • Ar represents a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms or a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl group having 5 to 14 ring atoms.
  • R 2 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted ring atom having 3 to 10 ring atoms.
  • 6a ′ Is reacted in the presence of a Lewis acid to give the following general formula (6a ′):
  • a diketone product represented by the following general formula (7a ′) is obtained by reacting the resulting diketone product with hydroxylamine.
  • Y represents a halogen atom or —OC ( ⁇ O) R 1 .
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atom number of 3 -10 cycloalkyl group, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, hydroxyl group, substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted 2 to 20 carbon atoms An alkenyloxy group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkanoyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenoyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or
  • the photopolymerization initiator of the present invention has a very high sensitivity to light (especially light having a short wavelength of 450 nm or less, for example, light having a wavelength of 365 nm or 405 nm), and thus can be thinned. A high-quality pattern can be formed at low cost. Furthermore, a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond, a compatibility with a liquid compound at 25 ° C. having an ether bond and / or an ester bond, and a solvent (at 25 ° C.
  • the photocurable composition for color filters, the amount of photopolymerization initiator added As a result, sensitivity, resolution, developability and deep part curability are improved. Conventionally, the solubility in a solvent has been enhanced while increasing the molecular weight by adding various substituents to the photopolymerization initiator.
  • the photopolymerization initiator of the present invention has a relatively small molecular weight and is photocurable.
  • the amount added to the composition can be reduced, and the compatibility with a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond, an ether bond and / or an ester bond at 25 ° C., which is higher than that of a conventional photopolymerization initiator, And a solvent (including a compound that is liquid at 25 ° C. having the ether bond and / or ester bond described above), and is excellent in sensitivity, resolution, developability, and adhesion to a substrate.
  • the photopolymerization initiator of the present invention is represented by the following general formula (I).
  • R 1 to R 11 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted Or an unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 ring atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, a hydroxyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or Unsubstituted alkenyloxy group having 2-20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkanoyl group having 1-20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkenoyl group having 2-20
  • Ar represents a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms or a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl group having 5 to 14 ring atoms.
  • W represents a single bond or an oxygen atom.
  • Z represents a single bond, an oxygen atom, or> NR 3 ′ (R 3 ′ represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or R 3 ′ is connected to R 3 together with a nitrogen atom. Forming a ring).
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 10. When n is an integer of 2 to 10, the plurality of R 4 and R 5 may be the same or different. )
  • photopolymerization initiators of the present invention represented by the general formula (I)
  • a photopolymerization initiator represented by the following general formula (Ia) (W: single bond) , Z: corresponding to an oxygen atom) and a photopolymerization initiator represented by the following general formula (Ib) (corresponding to the case where n is 1) are preferred.
  • R 1 to R 11 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted group Or an unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 ring atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, a hydroxyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or Unsubstituted alkenyloxy group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkanoyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, alkenoyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted aryl having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms And a substituted
  • R 3 together with R 4 or R 5 may form a ring, also, R 4 is a ring together with R 5 It may be formed.
  • Ar represents a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms or a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl group having 5 to 14 ring atoms.
  • W in the general formula (Ib) represents a single bond or an oxygen atom.
  • Z represents a single bond, an oxygen atom, or> NR 3 ′
  • R 3 ′ represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or R 3 'Is connected to R 3 to form a ring with the nitrogen atom.
  • N in the general formula (Ia) represents an integer of 1 to 10.
  • n is an integer of 2 to 10
  • the plurality of R 4 and R 5 may be the same or different.
  • n represents a low molecular weight, is compatible with a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond (hereinafter simply referred to as “compatible”), and is soluble in a solvent (hereinafter simply referred to as “soluble”).
  • soluble a solvent
  • an integer of 2 to 8 is preferable, an integer of 2 to 4 is more preferable, and 2 is more preferable.
  • the halogen atom independently represented by R 1 to R 11 include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
  • the alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms independently represented by R 1 to R 11 may be linear or branched, for example, methyl group, ethyl group, n-propyl group, isopropyl group, n-butyl Group, isobutyl group, t-butyl group, n-pentyl group, isopentyl group, n-hexyl group, n-octyl group, 2-ethyl-n-octyl group, n-decyl group, n-dodecyl group and the like. .
  • an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable, and an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms is more preferable from the viewpoint of low molecular weight, compatibility and solubility, and ease of production.
  • the alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms independently represented by R 1 to R 11 may be linear or branched, and examples thereof include a vinyl group, an allyl group, and a 7-octenyl group.
  • an alkenyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms is preferred, and an alkenyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferred from the viewpoint of low molecular weight, compatibility and solubility, and ease of production.
  • Examples of the cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 ring atoms independently represented by R 1 to R 11 include a cyclopropyl group, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, and a cyclooctyl group.
  • a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 6 ring atoms is preferable from the viewpoint of low molecular weight, compatibility and solubility, and ease of production.
  • Examples of the C 4-20 cycloalkenyl group independently represented by R 1 to R 11 include a cyclopentenyl group, a cyclohexenyl group, a cyclohexadienyl group, a cyclooctenyl group, and the like.
  • a cycloalkenyl group having 4 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable, and a cycloalkenyl group having 4 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferable from the viewpoint of low molecular weight, compatibility and solubility, and ease of production.
  • Examples of the alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms independently represented by R 1 to R 11 include those in which the alkyl group moiety is the aforementioned alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. Among these, an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable, and an alkoxy group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms is more preferable from the viewpoint of low molecular weight, compatibility and solubility, and ease of production.
  • Examples of the alkenyloxy group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms independently represented by R 1 to R 11 include those in which the alkenyl group moiety is the aforementioned alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • an alkenyloxy group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms is preferred, and an alkenyloxy group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferred from the viewpoint of low molecular weight, compatibility and solubility, and ease of production.
  • the alkanoyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms independently represented by R 1 to R 11 may be linear or branched.
  • an alkanoyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable, and an alkanoyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms is more preferable from the viewpoint of low molecular weight, compatibility and solubility, and ease of production.
  • the alkenoyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms independently represented by R 1 to R 11 may be linear or branched.
  • ethenoyl group, n-propenoyl group, isopropenoyl group, n-butenoyl group, t -Butenoyl group, n-hexenoyl group, n-octenoyl group, n-decenoyl group, n-dodecenoyl group and the like may be linear or branched.
  • ethenoyl group, n-propenoyl group, isopropenoyl group, n-butenoyl group, t -Butenoyl group, n-hexenoyl group, n-octenoyl group, n-decenoyl group, n-dodecenoyl group and the like Among these, an alkenoyl group having 2 to 10 carbon
  • Examples of the aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms independently represented by R 1 to R 11 include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, and an anthryl group.
  • Examples of the heterocyclic group having 3 to 14 ring atoms independently represented by R 1 to R 11 include a 2-furanyl group, a 2-thiophenyl group, a 2-pyridinyl group, and the following formula (A): Group (hereinafter referred to as substituent (A))
  • An unsaturated heterocyclic group having 5 to 14 ring atoms such as 2-tetrahydrofuryl group, 3-tetrahydrofuryl group, pyrrolidinyl group, piperidinyl group, 2,2,6,6-trimethylpiperidin-4-yl group, etc.
  • a saturated heterocyclic group having 3 to 10 ring atoms a saturated heterocyclic group having 3 to 10 ring atoms.
  • unsaturated heterocyclic groups having 5 to 6 ring atoms and saturated heterocyclic rings having 3 to 6 ring atoms are preferable. Groups are preferred.
  • R 3 and R 4 or R 5 together form a ring
  • n 2
  • W is a single bond
  • Z is an oxygen atom.
  • the ring illustrated in the right side and exemplified on the right side is given as a specific example.
  • Examples of the ring formed by combining R 4 and R 5 include rings having 3 to 10 (preferably 3 to 6) ring-forming carbon atoms such as a cyclopentyl ring and a cyclooctyl ring.
  • substituents for the alkyl group and alkenyl group independently represented by R 1 to R 11 include a hydroxyl group; a carboxyl group; a straight-chain or branched-chain carbon atom such as a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, and a propoxy group.
  • R 12 to R 23 each independently represents a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms. Examples of the alkyl group and aryl group are the same as those for R 1 to R 11 .
  • Examples of the substituent of the alkoxy group, alkenyloxy group, alkanoyl group, and alkenoyl group independently represented by R 1 to R 11 include a hydroxyl group; a carboxyl group; a linear or branched group such as a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, and a propoxy group
  • Examples of the substituent for the cycloalkyl group or cycloalkenyl group independently represented by R 1 to R 11 include a hydroxyl group; a carboxyl group; a linear or branched carbon number of 1 to 18 such as a methyl group or an ethyl group (preferably Is an alkyl group of 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5; linear or branched carbon number of 1 to 18 (preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1) such as methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, etc.
  • alkoxy group linear or branched alkenyloxy group having 2 to 18 carbon atoms (preferably 2 to 10 and more preferably 2 to 6); linear or branched carbon number 2 -18 (preferably 2 to 10, more preferably 2 to 6) alkenylthio group; straight chain having 2 to 18 carbon atoms (preferably 2 to 10, more preferably 2 to 6) such as vinyl group and allyl group Or branched alkeni
  • a trialkylsilyl group such as a trimethylsilyl
  • the substituents of the aryl group and heterocyclic group which R 1 to R 11 each independently represent include a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, a straight chain or branched chain having 1 to 18 carbon atoms (preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, etc.) (preferably An alkyl group having 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5; a linear or branched carbon number of 1 to 18 (preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 1) such as a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, or a propoxy group 5) an alkoxy group; a linear or branched alkenyloxy group having 2 to 18 carbon atoms (preferably 2 to 10, more preferably 2 to 6); a linear or branched carbon number 2 to 18 (preferably 2 to 10, more preferably 2 to 6) alkenylthio group; linear or branched alkylthio group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms (preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5) ; Straight of vinyl group, allyl group
  • branched alkenyl group having 2 to 18 preferably 2 to 10, more preferably 2 to 6) carbon atoms; a cycloalkenyl group having 5 to 18 (preferably 5 to 10) carbon atoms; a cyclopropyl group, A cycloalkyl group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms (preferably 3 to 10, more preferably 3 to 6) such as a cyclopentyl group and a cyclohexyl group; an aryloxy group having 6 to 10 ring carbon atoms such as a phenoxy group; a fluorine atom; trialkoxysilyl group such as trimethoxysilyl group; a trialkylsilyl group such as trimethylsilyl group; a cyano group; a nitro group chlorine atom, a bromine atom, a halogen atom such as iodine atom -COR 12; -OCOR 13; -NR 14 R 15; -NHCOR 16; -NH
  • Examples of the aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms represented by Ar include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, an anthryl group, a chrycenyl group, a phenanthrenyl group, an azulenyl group, and an acenaphthylenyl group.
  • a phenyl group having 6 to 10 ring carbon atoms is preferred, and a phenyl group is more preferred from the viewpoint of low molecular weight, compatibility and solubility, and ease of production.
  • heteroaryl group having 5 to 14 ring atoms represented by Ar examples include a 2-furanyl group, a 2-thiophenyl group, and a 2-pyridinyl group.
  • a heteroaryl group having 5 to 6 ring atoms is preferable, and a 2-furanyl group and a 2-thiophenyl group are more preferable.
  • These aryl groups and heteroaryl groups may have a substituent.
  • substituents examples include the same substituents as the aryl group independently represented by R 1 to R 11 described above, and among them, the number of carbon atoms is 1 to 18 (preferably 1 to 10, more preferably The alkyl group of 1 to 5) is preferable, and a methyl group is more preferable.
  • this substituent when this substituent is an alkyl group or an alkenyl group, it may form a condensed ring with Ar, for example, a fluorene ring, an indene ring, or the like.
  • Z represents>'R 3 in' NR 3, as described above, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or R 3 'is connected to the R 3, ring together with the nitrogen atom Is forming.
  • alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms include the same as those in the case of R 1 to R 11 , and preferable examples thereof are the same, and a methyl group is particularly preferable.
  • Specific examples of the ring formed by R 3 ′ connecting to R 3 together with the nitrogen atom include a morpholine ring, a pyrrolidine ring, a piperidine ring, a pipecoline ring, and a piperazine ring.
  • a morpholine ring is preferable.
  • Z is preferably an oxygen atom or> Nr 3 ′, and when W is an oxygen atom, Z is preferably a single bond or an oxygen atom.
  • R 1 , R 2 and R 3 are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, n is 2, A plurality of R 4 and R 5 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and Ar is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms.
  • R 1 , R 2 and R 3 are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, n is 2, and a plurality of R 4 And R 5 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and Ar is a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl group having 5 to 14 ring carbon atoms.
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently, location Or an alkyl group unsubstituted carbon atoms 1 ⁇ 20, R 3 is a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having a carbon 3 ⁇ 18, n is 2, a plurality of R 4 and R 5, Each independently a photopolymerization initiator which is a hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, (d) R 1 and R 2 are each independently substituted or unsubstituted carbon atoms having 1 to 20 alkyl groups, R 3 is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms substituted with a cyclic ether group having 3 to 6 ring atoms, n is 2, and a plurality of R 4 and R 5 are Independently, a photopolymerization initiator which is a hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is
  • the molecular weight is preferably 515 or less, and 500 or less. More preferably, in the case of the above (c) and (d), the molecular weight is preferably 550 or less.
  • R 4 to R 11 are each independently More preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. In addition, the preferable thing of each group is as having mentioned above. Specific examples of the photopolymerization initiator (Ia) of the present invention are shown below, but are not particularly limited thereto.
  • R 1 and R 3 are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, W is an oxygen atom, and Z is A single bond or an oxygen atom, and Ar is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms; (f) R 1 and R 3 are each independently substituted or unsubstituted.
  • a substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and R 2 is —OCOR 13 (R 13 is as defined above) or —COOR 20 (R 20 is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms).
  • Photoinitiator is a group, (g) R 1 and R 3 are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having a carbon number of 1 ⁇ 20, W is a single bond, Z is> NR 3 (R 3 'is as defined above), and Ar is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms, (h) R 1 and R 3 is each independently a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and R 2 is —OCOR 13 (R 13 is as defined above) or —COOR 20 (R 20 Represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms
  • Z is> NR 3 '(R 3', the are as defined.) and, Ar is a substituted if Photoinitiator is unsubstituted ring aryl group having 6 ⁇ 14, (i) R 1 is a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having a carbon number of 1 ⁇ 20, R 3 is a hydrogen atom Also preferred are photopolymerization initiators in which W is a single bond, Z is an oxygen atom, and Ar is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms.
  • R 3 ′ in> NR 3 ′ is preferably connected to R 3 to form a ring with a nitrogen atom, and forms a morpholine ring. Is more preferable.
  • R 4 to R 11 are each independently More preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • the preferable thing of each group is as having mentioned above. Specific examples of the photopolymerization initiator (Ib) of the present invention are shown below, but are not particularly limited thereto.
  • R 1 to R 3 , R 6 to R 11 and Ar are as defined above.
  • R 4 ′ and R 5 ′ have the same definitions as R 4 and R 5 , respectively, and preferred ones are also the same.
  • the method for producing the photopolymerization initiator (I) of the present invention is not particularly limited. It can be manufactured easily. (1. Method for producing photopolymerization initiator (Ia)) The method for producing the photopolymerization initiator (Ia) of the present invention is not particularly limited, but can be easily produced by, for example, the following steps 1 to 4.
  • Step 1 includes, for example, the carbazole derivative (1) and Z (CR 4 R 5 ) n COOR 3 (Z represents a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, or an iodine atom.
  • Z represents a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, or an iodine atom.
  • R 3 , R 4 and R 5 are as defined above
  • a step of reacting with a halide represented by By this step, a carbonylalkyl group-introduced product represented by the following general formula (3a) is obtained.
  • R 3 to R 11 are as defined above, and preferred ones are also the same.
  • the base include n-butyl lithium, t-butyl lithium, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide and the like.
  • the reaction temperature is usually preferably 0 to 200 ° C., and the reaction time is usually
  • Step 1 is the following step because production is easy.
  • the following general formula (1) (Wherein R 6 to R 11 are as defined above, and preferred ones are also the same.) [Hereinafter referred to as a carbazole derivative (1). And the following general formula (2a)
  • the amount of the acrylate derivative (2a) used in Step 1 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.5 to 2 mol, more preferably 0.8 to 1.2, relative to 1 mol of the carbazole derivative (1). From the viewpoint of reducing unreacted substances, it is more preferable to carry out the reaction in substantially equal amounts.
  • Step 1 is performed in the presence of a base.
  • the base may be any base that can be used for the Michael addition reaction, and any of organic bases and inorganic bases can be used. Examples of the organic base include pyridine, diazabicycloundecene (DBU), diazabicyclononene (DBN), and the like.
  • the inorganic base examples include alkali metal carbonates such as sodium carbonate and potassium carbonate; alkaline earth metal carbonates such as magnesium carbonate and calcium carbonate; alkali metal hydrogen carbonates such as sodium hydrogen carbonate and potassium hydrogen carbonate; sodium hydroxide And alkali metal hydroxides such as potassium hydroxide; alkaline earth metal hydroxides such as magnesium hydroxide and calcium hydroxide.
  • alkali metal carbonates and alkaline earth metal carbonates are preferable, alkali metal carbonates are more preferable, and potassium carbonate is more preferable.
  • the amount of the base to be used is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of reaction efficiency and production cost, it is preferably 0.5 to 2 mol, more preferably 0.8 to 1.
  • Step 1 is preferably performed in the presence of a solvent. What is necessary is just to select suitably the solvent which can melt
  • the reaction temperature in step 1 is not particularly limited, but is usually preferably 10 to 50 ° C, more preferably 15 to 40 ° C, and further preferably 15 to 30 ° C.
  • the reaction time varies depending on the type and amount of the carbazole derivative (1), acrylate derivative (2a) and base, the reaction temperature, etc., but is usually about 2 to 48 hours.
  • the embodiment of Step 1 is not particularly limited, and for example, the carbazole derivative (1), the acrylate derivative (2a), and the base are all added to the solvent, and preferably stirred at the above temperature to thereby introduce the carbonylalkyl group-introduced compound (3a ') Can get.
  • the carbonylalkyl group-introduced product (3a) or (3a ′) can be obtained from the obtained reaction mixture by an ordinary organic compound separation means such as extraction.
  • the purity of the carbonylalkyl group-introduced product (3a) or (3a ′) can also be increased by appropriately purifying by a usual organic compound purification means such as distillation, column chromatography, recrystallization and the like.
  • Step 2 using the carbonylalkyl group-introduced body (3a) or (3a ′) obtained in Step 1 will be described.
  • the carbonylalkyl group-introduced body (3a ′) corresponding to n 2 Will be omitted.
  • step 2 the carbonylalkyl group-introduced product (3a) obtained in step 1 and the following general formulas (4) and (5) (Wherein X represents a halogen atom or —OC ( ⁇ O) Ar, and X ′ represents a halogen atom or —OC ( ⁇ O) R 2.
  • Ar and R 2 are as defined above. The preferred ones are also the same.
  • acylating agent (4) and acylating agent (5) respectively.
  • examples of the halogen atom independently represented by X and X ′ include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom and an iodine atom, and a chlorine atom is preferred.
  • the reaction between the carbonylalkyl group-introduced product (3a) and the acylating agents (4) and (5) is carried out from the viewpoint of the yield of the desired diketone product (6a). It is preferable to react the acylating agent (5) after reacting 3a) with the acylating agent (4).
  • the amount of the acylating agents (4) and (5) used is from the viewpoint of introducing one acyl group into the carbonylalkyl group-introduced product (3a), and 1 mol of the carbonylalkyl group-introduced product (3a). Each of these is preferably 0.8 to 1.3 mol, more preferably 1 to 1.3 mol, and from the viewpoint of reducing unreacted substances, it is more preferable to carry out the reaction in substantially equal amounts.
  • the amount of the acylating agent (5) used is as described above.
  • Step 2 is performed in the presence of a Lewis acid.
  • a Lewis acid aluminum chloride and boron trifluoride diethyl ether complex are preferable.
  • the amount of Lewis acid used is usually preferably from 0.8 to 2.5 mol, more preferably from 1 mol of the acylating agent (4) or (5) from the viewpoint of the yield of the diketone body (6a). Is 1 to 2 moles.
  • Step 2 is preferably performed in the presence of a solvent.
  • the solvent is not particularly limited as long as it is a solvent that can be used in a normal Friedel-Crafts acylation reaction. Specific examples include dichloromethane, nitrobenzene, acetone, acetonitrile and the like.
  • the reaction temperature in step 2 is preferably ⁇ 50 to 5 ° C. (preferably ⁇ 10 to 5 ° C.) at the start of the reaction, and gradually returned to room temperature (about 15 to 25 ° C.) as the reaction proceeds.
  • the reaction time varies depending on the type and amount of the carbonylalkyl group-introduced product (3a), acylating agents (4) and (5), and the reaction temperature, but is usually preferably 1 to 30 hours.
  • both of the acylating agents (4) and (5) are acyl halides or acid anhydrides
  • the product is obtained after reacting the carbonylalkyl group-introduced product (3a) with the acylating agent (4). Can be subsequently reacted with the acylating agent (5) without isolation.
  • the reaction time of the carbonylalkyl group-introduced product (3a) and the acylating agent (4) is about 30 minutes to 5 hours (preferably 30 minutes to 3 hours), while the carbonylalkyl group-introduced product (3a )
  • the acylating agent (5) are preferably provided with a long reaction time of about 30 minutes to 24 hours (preferably 30 minutes to 18 hours) for sufficient reaction.
  • Step 2 Two preferred embodiments of Step 2 are described below.
  • the carbonyl alkyl group-introduced product (3a) and the acylating agent (4) are appropriately mixed in a solvent while cooling in an ice bath, and the Lewis acid is slowly added to the mixed solution (preferably 5 minutes to 1 hour, more (Preferably over 10 minutes to 40 minutes) After the addition, the mixture is returned to room temperature and stirring is continued for a certain time (about 30 minutes to 5 hours).
  • the product is once separated and obtained by performing usual organic compound separation means such as extraction and washing.
  • the product thus obtained is appropriately dissolved in a solvent, acylating agent (5) is added while cooling in an ice bath, and Lewis acid is slowly added thereto (preferably 5 minutes to 1 hour, more preferably 10 minutes to (Over 40 minutes), and after completion of the addition, the mixture is returned to room temperature and stirred for a certain time (about 30 minutes to 24 hours) to obtain the diketone body (6a).
  • acylating agent (5) is added while cooling in an ice bath
  • Lewis acid is slowly added thereto (preferably 5 minutes to 1 hour, more preferably 10 minutes to (Over 40 minutes)
  • the mixture is returned to room temperature and stirred for a certain time (about 30 minutes to 24 hours) to obtain the diketone body (6a).
  • the carbonyl alkyl group-introduced product (3a) is appropriately mixed with a solvent while cooling in an ice bath, and then the Lewis acid is slowly added (preferably 5 minutes to 1 hour, more preferably 10 minutes to 40 minutes).
  • the acylating agent (4) is added slowly (preferably over 5 minutes to 1 hour, more preferably over 10 minutes to 40 minutes) to the resulting mixed solution, and then returned to room temperature for a certain time (30 minutes). Continue stirring for about 5 hours.
  • the Lewis acid is added slowly (preferably over 5 minutes to 1 hour, more preferably over 10 minutes to 40 minutes) while cooling again in an ice bath, and the acylating agent (5) is added slowly (preferably over 10 minutes to 40 minutes). Is added for 5 minutes to 1 hour, more preferably over 10 minutes to 40 minutes, and after returning to room temperature, stirring is continued for a certain period of time (preferably about 30 minutes to 24 hours), whereby the diketone body (6a) Can be obtained.
  • diketone body (6a) can be obtained from the obtained reaction liquid mixture by the isolation
  • the purity of the diketone body (6a) can also be increased by appropriately purifying by a usual means for purifying organic compounds such as distillation, column chromatography, recrystallization and the like.
  • Step 3 is a reaction of the diketone body (6a) obtained in Step 2 with hydroxylamine to give the following general formula (7a). (Wherein R 2 to R 11 and Ar are as defined above, and preferred ones are also the same). [Hereinafter referred to as the oxime body (7a). ] Is a step of obtaining.
  • the hydroxylamine source is not particularly limited, but hydroxylamine chloride is preferred.
  • the hydroxylamine chloride can be reacted with, for example, sodium acetate in water to obtain an aqueous solution of hydroxylamine.
  • the amount of hydroxylamine (hydroxylamine chloride) to be used is preferably 0.8 to 2 mol, more preferably 1 to 1.5 mol, still more preferably 1 to 1.3 mol, relative to 1 mol of the diketone body (6a). From the viewpoint of reducing unreacted substances, it is more preferable to carry out the reaction in substantially the same amount.
  • Step 3 is preferably performed in the presence of a solvent.
  • a water-soluble organic solvent is preferable, and as the water-soluble organic solvent, for example, alcohols such as methanol and ethanol, dimethylformamide (DMF) and the like are preferable.
  • the reaction temperature in step 3 is not particularly limited, but is usually preferably 40 to 160 ° C., more preferably 50 to 140 ° C., and still more preferably 70 to 110 ° C. from the viewpoint of the yield of the oxime (7a). is there.
  • the reaction time varies depending on the type and amount of diketone (6a) and the reaction temperature, but is usually preferably 2 to 20 hours, more preferably 4 to 12 hours.
  • hydroxylamine chloride and sodium acetate are mixed in water to obtain an aqueous solution of hydroxylamine, and a diketone (6a) and a solvent are added thereto.
  • An oxime body (7a) can be obtained by stirring in the said temperature range.
  • the oxime body (7a) can be obtained from the resulting reaction mixture by an ordinary organic compound separation means such as extraction.
  • the purity of the oxime body (7a) can also be increased by appropriately purifying by a usual means for purifying organic compounds such as distillation, column chromatography, recrystallization and the like.
  • Step 4 includes the oxime body (7a) obtained in Step 3 and the following general formula (8):
  • Y represents a halogen atom or —OC ( ⁇ O) R 1.
  • R 1 is as defined above, and preferred ones are also the same.
  • examples of the halogen atom represented by Y include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom, and a chlorine atom is preferable.
  • a fluorine atom a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom
  • a chlorine atom is preferable.
  • it is 0.5-2 mol with respect to 1 mol of oxime bodies (7a), More preferably, it is 0.8-1. From the viewpoint of reducing unreacted substances, it is more preferable to carry out the reaction in substantially the same amount.
  • Step 4 may be performed in the presence of a base to promote the reaction. Examples of the base include organic bases and inorganic bases.
  • Examples of the organic base include amines such as triethylamine and tributylamine; nitrogen-containing heterocyclic aromatic compounds such as pyridine.
  • Examples of the inorganic base include alkali metal carbonates such as sodium carbonate; alkaline earth metal carbonates such as magnesium carbonate; alkali metal hydroxides such as sodium hydroxide; alkaline earth metal hydroxides such as magnesium hydroxide Is mentioned.
  • organic bases are preferable, amines and nitrogen-containing heterocyclic aromatic compounds are more preferable, and triethylamine and pyridine are more preferable from the viewpoint of reaction efficiency and production cost.
  • the amount used is preferably 1 to 5 moles, more preferably 1 mole relative to 1 mole of the oxime (7a), from the viewpoint of the yield of the photopolymerization initiator (Ia) and the production cost. Is 1.5 to 3 moles.
  • Step 4 is preferably performed in the presence of a solvent.
  • the solvent include ethers such as t-butyl methyl ether, ethyl methyl ether, cyclopentyl methyl ether, and tetrahydrofuran (THF).
  • the reaction temperature in step 4 is preferably ⁇ 50 to 5 ° C. (preferably ⁇ 10 to 5 ° C.) at the start of the reaction, and gradually returned to room temperature (about 15 to 25 ° C.) as the reaction proceeds.
  • the reaction time varies depending on the type and amount of the oxime (7a) and esterifying agent (8), and the reaction temperature, but is usually preferably 0.5 to 10 hours, more preferably 1 to 5 hours. .
  • an oxime body (7a) and an esterifying agent (8) are mixed in a solvent suitably, a base is dripped there, and the temperature of a reaction liquid is made gradually after completion
  • the photopolymerization initiator (Ia) of the present invention can be obtained.
  • the photopolymerization initiator (Ia) can be obtained from the resulting reaction mixture by an ordinary organic compound separation means such as extraction.
  • the purity of the photopolymerization initiator (Ia) can also be increased by appropriately purifying by a usual organic compound purification means such as distillation, column chromatography or recrystallization.
  • the photopolymerization initiator (Ia) of the present invention thus obtained has a special substituent containing an ester group attached to the nitrogen atom in the carbazole skeleton. Therefore, compatibility with a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond in the photocurable composition (particularly a compound having a (meth) acryloyloxy group), a compound having an ether bond and / or an ester bond and liquid at 25 ° C., And a solvent (including a compound having an ether bond and / or ester bond and a liquid at 25 ° C.), high sensitivity to light (especially light having a short wavelength of 450 nm or less), resolution and development It is considered that the properties and the deep part curability are excellent, and the adhesion to the substrate is further improved.
  • the photopolymerization initiator (Ia) is free from contamination of the polymer or apparatus due to decomposition products generated by light during exposure.
  • the high compatibility and solubility of the photopolymerization initiator (Ia) with respect to the specific compound or solvent is considered to contribute to the improvement of sensitivity, resolution and developability, and thus deep curability. It can be said that this is an important factor in color filter applications.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is preferably dissolved in an amount of 5 parts by mass or more with respect to 100 parts by mass of a solvent having an ether bond and / or an ester bond (particularly propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate).
  • the photopolymerization initiator (Ia) of the present invention satisfies such conditions, and is included in the photocurable composition for color filters, It is suitable as a photopolymerization initiator to be contained in a highly light-shielding photocurable composition for black matrix.
  • the method for producing the photopolymerization initiator (Ib) of the present invention is not particularly limited, but can be easily produced by, for example, the following steps 1 to 4.
  • Step 1 Since the manufacturing method of Step 1 is different depending on W and Z, each case will be described below. ⁇ When W is a single bond and Z is> NR 3 '> The following general formula (1) (Wherein R 6 to R 11 are as defined above, and preferred ones are also the same.) [Hereinafter referred to as a carbazole derivative (1). And the following general formula (2b)
  • R 3 , R 3 ′ and R 4 to R 11 are as defined above, and preferred ones are also the same.
  • the amount of the acrylamide derivative (2b) used in Step 1 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.5 to 2 mol, more preferably 0.8 to 1.2, relative to 1 mol of the carbazole derivative (1). From the viewpoint of reducing unreacted substances, it is more preferable to carry out the reaction in substantially equal amounts.
  • Step 1 is performed in the presence of a base.
  • a base a base that can be used in the Michael addition reaction can be used, and there is no particular limitation, and either an organic base or an inorganic base can be used.
  • Examples of the organic base include pyridine, diazabicycloundecene (DBU), diazabicyclononene (DBN) and the like, and bases having low nucleophilicity are preferable, and DBU and DBN are more preferable.
  • Examples of the inorganic base include alkali metal carbonates such as sodium carbonate and potassium carbonate; alkaline earth metal carbonates such as magnesium carbonate and calcium carbonate; alkali metal hydrogen carbonates such as sodium hydrogen carbonate and potassium hydrogen carbonate; Examples include alkali metal hydroxides such as sodium and potassium hydroxide; alkaline earth metal hydroxides such as magnesium hydroxide and calcium hydroxide.
  • alkali metal carbonates and alkaline earth metal carbonates are preferable, alkali metal carbonates are more preferable, and potassium carbonate is more preferable.
  • the amount of the base to be used is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of reaction efficiency and production cost, it is preferably 0.5 to 2 mol, more preferably 0.8 to 1. mol per mol of the carbazole derivative (1). More preferably, it is 2 moles and is used in an approximately equal amount.
  • Step 1 is preferably performed in the presence of a solvent. What is necessary is just to select suitably the solvent which can melt
  • the reaction temperature in step 1 is not particularly limited, but is usually preferably 10 to 50 ° C, more preferably 15 to 40 ° C, and further preferably 15 to 30 ° C. Although there is no restriction
  • the reaction time varies depending on the kind and amount of the carbazole derivative (1), acrylamide derivative (2b) and base, reaction temperature, reaction pressure, etc., but is usually preferably about 2 to 48 hours.
  • carbazole derivative (1), acrylamide derivative (2b), and a base are all added to a solvent, Preferably it is stirred at the said temperature, Amide group introduction body (3b) Can be manufactured.
  • the amide group-introduced product (3b) can be obtained from the resulting reaction mixture by an ordinary organic compound separation means such as extraction.
  • the purity of the amide group-introduced product (3b) can also be increased by appropriately purifying by a usual organic compound purification means such as distillation, column chromatography, recrystallization and the like.
  • a commercial item can also be used as this amide group introduction
  • the alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms represented by R 24 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an isopropyl group, an n-butyl group, an isobutyl group, and a t-butyl group. Among these, a methyl group and an ethyl group are preferable.
  • an organic base and an inorganic base can be used.
  • the organic base include pyridine, diazabicycloundecene (DBU), diazabicyclononene (DBN) and the like, and bases having low nucleophilicity are preferable, and DBU and DBN are more preferable.
  • the inorganic base examples include alkali metal carbonates such as sodium carbonate and potassium carbonate; alkaline earth metal carbonates such as magnesium carbonate and calcium carbonate; alkali metal hydrogen carbonates such as sodium hydrogen carbonate and potassium hydrogen carbonate; Examples include alkali metal hydroxides such as sodium and potassium hydroxide; alkaline earth metal hydroxides such as magnesium hydroxide and calcium hydroxide.
  • an inorganic base is preferable, and an alkali metal hydroxide is more preferable.
  • the amount of the base to be used is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of reaction efficiency and production cost, it is preferably 0.5 to 2 mol, more preferably 0.8 to 1. mol per mol of the carbazole derivative (1).
  • the first reaction is preferably carried out in the presence of a solvent.
  • a solvent capable of dissolving the carbazole derivative (1), the carboxylic acid group introducing agent (2b ′) and the base may be appropriately selected. Specific examples include dimethylformamide (DMF), dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO), methylene chloride and the like, with DMF being preferred.
  • the reaction temperature of the first reaction is not particularly limited, but is usually preferably 10 to 50 ° C, more preferably 15 to 40 ° C, and further preferably 15 to 30 ° C. Although there is no restriction
  • the reaction time varies depending on the type and amount of the carbazole derivative (1) and the base, the amount of the carboxylic acid group introducing agent (2b ′), the reaction temperature, the reaction pressure, etc., but it is usually preferably 2 hours to 48 hours. It is about time. There is no particular limitation on the embodiment of the first reaction.
  • the carbazole derivative (1), the carboxylic acid group introducing agent (2b ′) and the base are all added to the solvent, and preferably stirred at the above temperature to obtain the carboxylic acid.
  • a group-containing carbazole derivative can be produced.
  • the carboxylic acid group-containing carbazole derivative can be obtained by an ordinary organic compound separation means such as extraction.
  • the purity of the carboxylic acid group-containing carbazole derivative can be increased by appropriately purifying by a usual organic compound purification means such as distillation, column chromatography, recrystallization and the like.
  • the amount of thionyl chloride used in the second reaction is preferably about 1 to 10 mol, more preferably about 2 to 5 mol, per 1 mol of the carbazole derivative (1) used in the first reaction. It is.
  • the amount of the amine represented by HNR 3 R 3 ′ used in the second reaction is preferably about 1 to 10 mol per 1 mol of the carbazole derivative (1) used in the first reaction. More preferably, it is about 2 to 7 mol.
  • the second reaction is preferably carried out in the presence of a solvent.
  • the solvent is not particularly limited as long as it is a solvent capable of dissolving the carboxylic acid group-containing carbazole derivative and the amine. For example, dichloromethane, nitrobenzene, acetone, acetonitrile and the like can be mentioned, and acetonitrile is preferable.
  • the reaction temperature of the second reaction is not particularly limited, but is usually preferably 10 to 50 ° C, more preferably 15 to 40 ° C, and further preferably 15 to 30 ° C. Although there is no restriction
  • the reaction time varies depending on the kinds and amounts of the carboxylic acid group-containing carbazole derivative, the amine and the base, the reaction temperature, the reaction pressure, and the like, but is usually preferably about 1 to 10 hours.
  • the embodiment of the second reaction is not particularly limited. For example, the carboxylic acid group-containing carbazole derivative and the amine are added to a solvent, and thionyl chloride is added dropwise thereto.
  • an amide group-introduced product (3b) can be produced.
  • the amide group-introduced product (3b) can be obtained from the resulting reaction mixture by an ordinary organic compound separation means such as extraction.
  • the purity of the amide group-introduced product (3b) can also be increased by appropriately purifying by a usual organic compound purification means such as distillation, column chromatography, recrystallization and the like.
  • R 6 to R 11 are as defined above, and preferred ones are also the same.
  • the hydroxyl group-containing carbazole derivative is R 3 COY (where R 3 is as defined above, and the preferred one is also the same.
  • Y represents a halogen atom).
  • the following general formula (3b ′) (Wherein R 3 to R 11 are as defined above, and preferred ones are also the same).
  • An ester group-introduced body represented by the formula [hereinafter referred to as an ester group-introduced body (3b ′). ] Is preferable.
  • the amount of ethylene carbonate used in the first reaction is preferably 0.7 to 15 mol, more preferably 1 to 10 mol, relative to 1 mol of the carbazole derivative (1).
  • the base used in the first reaction is preferably an organic base, and examples thereof include amines such as triethylamine and tributylamine; nitrogen-containing heterocyclic aromatic compounds such as pyridine. Among these, amines are preferable, and triethylamine is more preferable.
  • the amount of the base to be used is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of reaction efficiency and production cost, it is preferably 0.5 to 2 mol, more preferably 0.8 to 1. mol per mol of the carbazole derivative (1). More preferably, it is 2 moles and is used in an approximately equal amount.
  • the first reaction is preferably carried out in the presence of a solvent.
  • a solvent which can melt
  • Specific examples include dimethylformamide (DMF), dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO), methylene chloride and the like, with DMF being preferred.
  • the reaction temperature of the first reaction is not particularly limited, but is usually preferably 60 to 130 ° C, more preferably 80 to 120 ° C, and further preferably 90 to 110 ° C. Although there is no restriction
  • the reaction time varies depending on the type and amount of the carbazole derivative (1) and base, the amount of ethylene carbonate used, the reaction temperature, the reaction pressure, etc., but it is usually preferably about 1 to 10 hours.
  • the embodiment of the first reaction is not particularly limited, and for example, the carbazole derivative (1), ethylene carbonate, and base are all added to a solvent, and preferably stirred at the temperature to produce the hydroxyl group-containing carbazole derivative.
  • the hydroxyl group-containing carbazole derivative can be obtained from the resulting reaction mixture by an ordinary organic compound separation means such as extraction.
  • the purity of the hydroxyl group-containing carbazole derivative can also be increased by appropriately purifying by an ordinary organic compound purification means such as distillation, column chromatography, recrystallization and the like.
  • Examples of the acyl halide represented by R 3 COY used in the second reaction include acyl chloride and acyl iodide, and acyl chloride is preferred.
  • the amount of the acyl halide used is preferably about 0.7 to 3 mol, more preferably 1 to 2 mol, based on 1 mol of the carbazole derivative (1) used in the first reaction. More preferably.
  • As the base used in the second reaction for example, amines such as triethylamine, tributylamine and diisopropylethylamine are preferable.
  • the amount of the base used is preferably about 0.7 to 3 mol, more preferably 1 to 2 mol, more preferably about 1 to 2 mol, relative to 1 mol of the acyl halide.
  • the second reaction is preferably carried out in the presence of a solvent.
  • a solvent that can be used in a usual acylation reaction can be used, and there is no particular limitation as long as the reaction is not inhibited. Specific examples include dichloromethane, nitrobenzene, acetone, acetonitrile and the like, and acetonitrile is preferred.
  • the reaction temperature of the second reaction is not particularly limited, but is usually preferably 10 to 50 ° C, more preferably 15 to 40 ° C, and further preferably 15 to 30 ° C. Although there is no restriction
  • the reaction time varies depending on the kinds and amounts of the hydroxyl group-containing carbazole derivative, the acyl halide and the base, the reaction temperature, the reaction pressure, and the like, but is usually preferably about 1 to 10 hours.
  • ester group introduction body ( 3b ′) by adding all the said hydroxyl group containing carbazole derivatives, the said acyl halide, and a base in a solvent and preferably stirring at the said temperature, ester group introduction body ( 3b ′) can be produced. After completion of the reaction, an ester group-introduced product (3b ′) can be obtained from the resulting reaction mixture by a usual organic compound separation means such as extraction. The purity of the ester group-introduced product (3b ′) can also be increased by appropriately purifying by a usual organic compound purification means such as distillation, column chromatography, recrystallization and the like.
  • step 2 the amide group introduced body (3b) or ester group introduced body (3b ′) obtained in step 1 [hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as a functional group introduced body (3b) for convenience.
  • a functional group introduced body (3b) for convenience.
  • the following general formulas (4) and (5) (Wherein X represents a halogen atom or —OC ( ⁇ O) Ar, and X ′ represents a halogen atom or —OC ( ⁇ O) R 2.
  • Ar and R 2 are as defined above. The preferred ones are also the same.)
  • acylating agent (4) and acylating agent (5) are referred to as acylating agent (4) and acylating agent (5), respectively.
  • 6b the following general formula (6b)
  • examples of the halogen atom independently represented by X and X ′ include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom and an iodine atom, and a chlorine atom is preferred.
  • the reaction between the functional group-introduced product (3b) and the acylating agents (4) and (5) is performed in terms of the yield of the desired diketone product (6b). It is preferable to react the acylating agent (5) with the acylating agent (4).
  • the amount of the acylating agent (4) and (5) used is from the viewpoint of introducing each acyl group into the functional group-introduced body (3b) one by one with respect to 1 mol of the functional group-introduced body (3b).
  • the amount is preferably 0.8 to 1.3 mol, more preferably 1 to 1.3 mol, and it is more preferable to carry out the reaction in substantially the same amount from the viewpoint of reducing unreacted substances.
  • the amount of the acylating agent (5) used is within the above range.
  • Step 2 is performed in the presence of a Lewis acid.
  • a Lewis acid aluminum chloride and boron trifluoride diethyl ether complex are preferable.
  • the amount of Lewis acid used is usually preferably 0.8 to 2.5 mol, more preferably 1 mol per mol of the acylating agent (4) or (5) from the viewpoint of the yield of the diketone body (6b). Is 1 to 2 moles.
  • Step 2 is preferably performed in the presence of a solvent.
  • the solvent is not particularly limited as long as it is a solvent that can be used in a normal Friedel-Crafts acylation reaction. Specific examples include dichloromethane, nitrobenzene, acetone, acetonitrile and the like.
  • the reaction temperature in step 2 is preferably ⁇ 50 to 5 ° C. (preferably ⁇ 10 to 5 ° C.) at the start of the reaction, and gradually returned to room temperature (about 15 to 25 ° C.) as the reaction proceeds.
  • the reaction time varies depending on the type and amount of the functional group-introduced product (3b), the acylating agents (4) and (5), and the reaction temperature, but is usually preferably 1 to 30 hours.
  • both of the acylating agents (4) and (5) are acyl halides or acid anhydrides
  • the product after reacting the functional group-introducing body (3b) with the acylating agent (4), the product is It can also be reacted with the acylating agent (5) without isolation.
  • the reaction time of the functional group-introduced product (3b) and the acylating agent (4) is about 30 minutes to 5 hours (preferably 30 minutes to 3 hours), while the functional group-introduced product (3b)
  • the reaction time with the acylating agent (5) is set to be as long as about 30 minutes to 24 hours (preferably 30 minutes to 18 hours) for sufficient reaction.
  • step 2 the functional group-introducing body (3b) is appropriately mixed with a solvent while cooling in an ice bath, and Lewis acid is slowly added to the mixed solution (preferably 5 minutes to 1 hour, more preferably 10 minutes to 40 minutes).
  • the acylating agent (4) is slowly added (preferably 5 minutes to 1 hour, more preferably over 10 minutes to 40 minutes), and the temperature is returned to room temperature for a certain time (30 minutes to 5 hours). Degree) Continue stirring.
  • the acylating agent (5) is added while cooling in an ice bath, and the Lewis acid is added slowly (preferably over 5 minutes to 1 hour, more preferably over 10 minutes to 40 minutes).
  • the diketone body (6b) can be obtained by returning to room temperature and continuing stirring for a certain period of time (about 30 minutes to 24 hours). After completion of the reaction, the diketone body (6b) can be obtained from the resulting reaction mixture by an ordinary organic compound separation means such as extraction. The purity of the diketone body (6b) can also be increased by appropriately purifying by a usual organic compound purification means such as distillation, column chromatography, recrystallization and the like.
  • Step 3 is a reaction of the diketone body (6b) obtained in Step 2 with hydroxylamine to give the following general formula (7b): (Wherein R 2 to R 11 , Ar, W and Z are as defined above, and preferred ones are also the same). [Hereinafter referred to as oxime body (7b). ] Is a step of obtaining.
  • the hydroxylamine source is not particularly limited, but hydroxylamine chloride is preferred.
  • the hydroxylamine chloride can be reacted with, for example, sodium acetate in water to obtain an aqueous solution of hydroxylamine.
  • the amount of hydroxylamine (hydroxylamine chloride) to be used is preferably 0.8 to 2 mol, more preferably 1 to 1.5 mol, and still more preferably 1 to 1.3 mol, relative to 1 mol of the diketone body (6b). From the viewpoint of reducing unreacted substances, it is more preferable to carry out the reaction in substantially equal amounts.
  • Step 3 is preferably performed in the presence of a solvent.
  • a water-soluble organic solvent is preferable, and as the water-soluble organic solvent, for example, alcohols such as methanol and ethanol, dimethylformamide (DMF) and the like are preferable.
  • the reaction temperature in step 3 is not particularly limited, but is usually preferably 40 to 160 ° C., more preferably 50 to 140 ° C., and still more preferably 70 to 110 ° C. from the viewpoint of the yield of the oxime (7b). is there. While the reaction time varies depending on the type and amount of diketone (6b) and the reaction temperature, it is usually preferably 0.5 to 20 hours, more preferably 1 to 12 hours. There is no particular limitation on the embodiment of Step 3. For example, hydroxylamine chloride and sodium acetate are mixed in water to obtain an aqueous solution of hydroxylamine, and a diketone (6b) and a solvent are added thereto. An oxime body (7b) can be obtained by stirring in the said temperature range.
  • the oxime body (7b) can be obtained from the resulting reaction mixture by an ordinary organic compound separation means such as extraction.
  • the purity of the oxime body (7b) can also be increased by appropriately purifying it by a usual means for purifying organic compounds such as distillation, column chromatography, recrystallization and the like.
  • Step 4 includes the oxime body (7b) obtained in Step 3 and the following general formula (8):
  • Y represents a halogen atom or —OC ( ⁇ O) R 1.
  • R 1 is as defined above, and preferred ones are also the same.
  • examples of the halogen atom represented by Y include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom, and a chlorine atom is preferable.
  • the amount of the esterifying agent (8) used in Step 4 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.5 to 2 mol, more preferably 0.8 to 1. mol based on 1 mol of the oxime (7b). From the viewpoint of reducing unreacted substances, it is more preferable to carry out the reaction in substantially the same amount.
  • Step 4 may be performed in the presence of a base to promote the reaction. Examples of the base include organic bases and inorganic bases.
  • Examples of the organic base include amines such as triethylamine and tributylamine; nitrogen-containing heterocyclic aromatic compounds such as pyridine.
  • Examples of the inorganic base include alkali metal carbonates such as sodium carbonate; alkaline earth metal carbonates such as magnesium carbonate; alkali metal hydroxides such as sodium hydroxide; alkaline earth metal hydroxides such as magnesium hydroxide Is mentioned.
  • organic bases are preferable, amines and nitrogen-containing heterocyclic aromatic compounds are more preferable, and triethylamine and pyridine are more preferable from the viewpoint of reaction efficiency and production cost.
  • the amount used is preferably 1 to 5 with respect to 1 mol of the oxime (7b) from the viewpoint of the yield of the photopolymerization initiator (Ib) and the production cost.
  • Mol more preferably 1.5 to 3 mol.
  • Step 4 is preferably performed in the presence of a solvent.
  • the solvent include ethers such as t-butyl methyl ether, ethyl methyl ether, cyclopentyl methyl ether, and tetrahydrofuran (THF).
  • the reaction temperature in step 4 is preferably ⁇ 50 to 5 ° C. (preferably ⁇ 10 to 5 ° C.) at the start of the reaction, and gradually returned to room temperature (about 15 to 25 ° C.) as the reaction proceeds.
  • the reaction time varies depending on the kind and amount of the oxime (7b) and esterifying agent (8), and the reaction temperature, but is usually preferably 0.5 to 10 hours, more preferably 1 to 5 hours. .
  • an oxime body (7b) and an esterifying agent (8) are mixed in a solvent suitably, a base is dripped there, and the temperature of a reaction liquid is gradually made to drop after completion
  • the photopolymerization initiator (Ib) of the present invention can be obtained.
  • the photopolymerization initiator (Ib) can be obtained from the resulting reaction mixture by a usual organic compound separation means such as extraction.
  • the purity of the photopolymerization initiator (Ib) can also be increased by appropriately purifying by a usual organic compound purification means such as distillation, column chromatography, recrystallization and the like.
  • the photopolymerization initiator (Ib) of the present invention thus obtained has a special substituent containing an ester group or an amide bond (or an amide bond forming a ring) on the nitrogen atom in the carbazole skeleton. . Therefore, compatibility with a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond (particularly a compound having a (meth) acryloyloxy group) and a compound having an ether bond and / or an ester bond in a photocurable composition at 25 ° C. High solubility in solvents (including the above-mentioned liquid compounds at 25 ° C.
  • the photopolymerization initiator (Ib) is free from contamination of the polymer or apparatus due to decomposition products generated by light during exposure. Note that the high compatibility and solubility of the photopolymerization initiator (Ib) with respect to a specific compound or solvent is considered to contribute to the improvement of sensitivity, resolution and developability, and thus deep curability. It can be said that this is an important factor in color filter applications.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is preferably dissolved in an amount of 5 parts by mass or more with respect to 100 parts by mass of a solvent having an ether bond and / or an ester bond (particularly propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate). More preferably, 10 parts by mass or more is dissolved, and the photopolymerization initiator (Ib) of the present invention satisfies such conditions, and is included in the photocurable composition for color filters, It is suitable as a photopolymerization initiator to be contained in a highly light-shielding photocurable composition for black matrix.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention contains at least one compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond and / or binder resin and the photopolymerization initiator (I).
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention further includes a colorant and, if necessary, a photopolymerization initiator other than the photopolymerization initiator (I), a dispersant, a polyfunctional monomer, a monofunctional monomer, and sensitization.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention the content of the photopolymerization initiator (I) is preferably 2 to 50 mass based on the solid content of the photocurable composition from the viewpoints of sensitivity, resolution and developability. %, More preferably 2 to 30% by mass, still more preferably 4 to 15% by mass.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention contains a photopolymerization initiator other than the photopolymerization initiator (I)
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator other than the photopolymerization initiator (I) is:
  • it is 100 mass parts or less with respect to 100 mass parts of photoinitiators (I), More preferably, it is 50 mass parts or less, More preferably, it is 20 mass parts.
  • it is more preferably 10 parts by mass or less, particularly preferably 5 parts by mass or less.
  • a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond is a compound that is capable of becoming a binder in a photocurable composition by causing a polymerization reaction when irradiated with light in the presence of the photopolymerization initiator (I). It can serve as a binder in the pixel.
  • the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferably contained in the photocurable composition of the present invention in an amount of 5 to 60% by mass, more preferably 10 to 40% by mass. Within this range, the adhesion between the formed pixel and the substrate tends to be good.
  • the compound which has an ethylenically unsaturated bond may be used together with the binder resin mentioned later. When using together, it is preferable in the total content being in the said range.
  • Specific examples of the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include unsaturated monocarboxylic acids such as (meth) acrylic acid, crotonic acid and ⁇ -chloroacrylic acid; unsaturated dicarboxylic acids such as maleic acid, fumaric acid and itaconic acid Or anhydrides thereof; trivalent or higher unsaturated polycarboxylic acids such as trimellitic acid and pyromellitic acid or anhydrides thereof; styrene, ⁇ -methylstyrene, chlorostyrene, methoxystyrene, divinylbenzene, vinyltoluene, etc.
  • a compound having a (meth) acryloyloxy group is preferable from the viewpoint of compatibility with the photopolymerization initiator (I) of the present invention.
  • the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond one type may be used alone, or two or more types may be used in combination.
  • the photopolymerization initiator Since the compatibility with I is further improved, the amount of the solvent described later in the photocurable composition of the present invention can be reduced or no solvent can be used. Therefore, it is also preferable to use such a compound.
  • the amount of the solvent is 10 mass relative to the total amount of the photocurable composition. % Or less, further 5% by mass or less, and solvent-free.
  • the binder resin plays a role as a binder in the formed pixel and is not particularly limited as long as it has good adhesion to the substrate.
  • a binder resin is preferably contained in the solid content of the photocurable composition of the present invention in an amount of 5 to 60% by mass, more preferably 10 to 40% by mass. Within this range, the adhesion between the formed pixel and the substrate tends to be good.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the binder resin is preferably 3,000 to 100,000, more preferably 5,000 to 50,000, from the viewpoint of adhesion between the formed pixel and the substrate. In the present specification, the weight average molecular weight is a value in terms of polystyrene measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC).
  • the binder resin may be used in combination with the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond.
  • the binder resin the same binder resin as that used in a general photocurable composition for a color filter can be used. Specifically, ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer, ethylene-vinyl chloride copolymer, polystyrene, acrylonitrile-styrene copolymer, ABS resin, polymethacrylic acid resin, ethylene methacrylic acid resin, polyvinyl chloride resin, chlorination Vinyl chloride, polyvinyl alcohol, polyethylene terephthalate, polybutylene terephthalate, polycarbonate, polyvinyl acetal, polyether ether ketone, polyether sulfone, polyphenylene sulfide, polyarylate, polyvinyl butyral, epoxy resin, phenoxy resin, polyimide resin, polyamideimide resin, Examples thereof include polyamic acid resins, polyetherimide resins, phenol resins, urea resins and the like.
  • polymerizable monomers such as methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, n-propyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, s-butyl (meth) acrylate, isobutyl (meth) acrylate, t- Butyl (meth) acrylate, n-pentyl (meth) acrylate, n-hexyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, n-octyl (meth) acrylate, n-decyl (meth) acrylate, styrene, ⁇ - Methyl styrene, N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone, glycidyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate,
  • binder resins include alkali-soluble resins having an acidic functional group such as a carboxyl group, such as alkali-soluble acrylic resins.
  • alkali-soluble resin having a carboxyl group a copolymer of a carboxyl group-containing unsaturated monomer and another copolymerizable ethylenically unsaturated monomer is preferable, and an epoxy group and an ethylenically unsaturated group are further included in the molecule.
  • a compound having a group and a group such as glycidyl (meth) acrylate added thereto and an ethylenically unsaturated group introduced into the side chain is preferred.
  • carboxyl group-containing unsaturated monomer examples include (meth) acrylic acid, crotonic acid, maleic acid, maleic anhydride, succinic acid mono [2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl], and phthalic acid mono [2].
  • -(Meth) acryloyloxyethyl] ⁇ -carboxypolycaprolactone mono (meth) acrylate and the like are preferable, and (meth) acrylic acid is particularly preferable.
  • a carboxyl group-containing unsaturated monomer may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together.
  • Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated monomer include methyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, and allyl (meth).
  • styrene ⁇ -methylstyrene
  • benzyl (meth) acrylate hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-dimethylaminoethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxyl (meth) ethyl acrylate, di Cyclopentenyl (meth) acrylate and the like, and macromonomers thereof; N-methylmaleimide, N-cyclohexylmaleimide, N-benzylmaleimide, N-phenylmaleimide, N-methylphenylmaleimide, etc. Substituted maleimide, and the like can be mentioned.
  • an ethylenically unsaturated monomer may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention may further contain a coloring material to form a colored photocurable composition.
  • the coloring material include pigments, dyes, and natural pigments.
  • a color material may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together. From the viewpoint of color reproducibility, curability and developability, the color material is preferably contained in the solid content of the photocurable composition of the present invention in an amount of 5 to 60% by mass, more preferably 5 to 50% by mass.
  • the pigment include organic pigments and inorganic pigments, and organic pigments are preferable from the viewpoint of color developability and heat resistance.
  • organic pigment examples include compounds classified as Pigment (CI Pigment Blue, CI Pigment Violet, C.I .; issued by The Society of Dyers and Colorists). CI pigment green, CI pigment red, CI pigment yellow, CI pigment orange, and the like.
  • the color material is preferably more uniformly dispersed by the following dispersant.
  • Dispersant Any dispersant can be used as long as it can uniformly disperse the colorant, and a known dispersant can be used. Specific examples include polymer dispersants such as modified polyurethane, modified polyacrylate, modified polyester, and modified polyamide, and surfactants and pigment derivatives such as phosphate esters, alkylamines, and polyoxyethylene alkylphenyl ethers. .
  • polymer dispersants are preferable, and specific commercial product names include EFKA-4046, EFKA-4047, EFKA polymer 10, EFKA polymer 400, EFKA polymer 401, EFKA polymer 4300, and EFKA polymer 4330 ( As described above, manufactured by Ciba Specialty Chemicals Co., Ltd., Disperbyk111, Disperbyk161, Disperbyk165, Disperbyk167, Disperbyk182, Disperbyk2000, Disperbyk2001, ER made by ER ), Addisper (registered trademark) PB821, PB 22 (manufactured by Ajinomoto Fine-Techno Co., Ltd.), and the like.
  • the content is not particularly limited as long as the above-described coloring material can be uniformly dispersed. From the viewpoint of dispersibility, developability of the photocurable composition, and reduction of development residue at unexposed locations, preferably 0.5 to 30% by mass relative to the total solid content of the photocurable composition.
  • the content is preferably 1 to 20% by mass.
  • polyfunctional monomer As the polyfunctional monomer that may be appropriately contained in the photocurable composition of the present invention, a monomer having a (meth) acryloyloxy group compatible with the binder resin, specifically, a bifunctional (meth) acrylate and Trifunctional or higher functional (meth) acrylates are preferred.
  • a polyfunctional monomer may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together.
  • bifunctional (meth) acrylate examples include 1,4-butanediol (meth) acrylate, neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate, 1,6-hexanediol di (meth) acrylate, and polypropylene glycol di (meth) Examples include acrylate, triethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, and bisphenol A di (meth) acrylate.
  • trifunctional or higher functional (meth) acrylate examples include trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, trimethylolethane tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, Carboxyl group-containing polyfunctional (meta ) Acrylates.
  • the content thereof is preferably 3 to 50% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photocurable composition. If it is in this range, photocuring sufficiently proceeds, so that there is no possibility that the exposed portion is eluted during alkali development, and the alkali developability is good.
  • Monofunctional monomers that may be appropriately contained in the photocurable composition of the present invention are preferably (meth) acrylates, such as allyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, butoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, butoxy Ethylene glycol (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, glycerol (meth) acrylate, glycidyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, isodexyl (meth) acrylate, isooctyl (meth) acrylate, lauryl (meth) acrylate, 2-methoxyethyl Meth)
  • the photocurable composition of this invention may contain a sensitizer as needed.
  • the sensitizer absorbs the irradiated energy when it is exposed after the photocurable composition of the present invention is applied on the substrate, and the absorbed energy is used to initiate the reaction of the photopolymerization initiator of the present invention. It is a substance that plays a role of contributing to Specific examples of the sensitizer include 4,4′-bis (diethylamino) benzophenone, 4,4′-bis (dimethylamino) benzophenone, 4-methyl-4′-diethylaminobenzophenone, 4-methoxy-4 ′.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention contains a sensitizer, the content thereof is preferably 1 to 10% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photocurable composition.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention may contain a solvent in order to disperse the coloring material.
  • the solvent is not particularly limited as long as it is used for a general photocurable composition for a color filter.
  • alkylene glycol such as ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, diethylene glycol diethyl ether, and dipropylene glycol dimethyl ether.
  • Alkyl ethers and their acetates Alkyl ethers and their acetates; diacetates such as propylene glycol diacetate and 1,3-butylene glycol diacetate; ethers such as tetrahydrofuran; ketones such as methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone and 2-heptanone; Methyl hydroxypropionate, ethyl 3-hydroxypropionate, ethyl acetate, n-butyl Esters such as cetate, isobutyl acetate, isobutyl butyrate, n-butyl butyrate, ethyl 3-methoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, 3-methoxybutyl acetate, ethyl lactate, cyclohexanol acetate; aromatics such as toluene and xylene Group hydrocarbons and the like.
  • a solvent may be used individually by
  • a compound that has an ether bond and / or an ester bond and is liquid at 25 ° C. specifically, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, 3-methoxy Butyl acetate, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, and diethylene glycol diethyl ether are preferable, and a liquid compound having an ether bond and an ester bond at 25 ° C. is more preferable.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention contains a solvent, the content thereof is preferably 50 to 90% by mass in the total amount of the photocurable composition.
  • the pigment dispersibility is good and the resist coating characteristics (in-plane uniformity) can be made good.
  • the photopolymerization initiator of the present invention is excellent in compatibility with a liquid compound at 25 ° C. having an ether bond and / or an ester bond, the solvent has an ether bond and / or an ester bond at 25 ° C. If it is a liquid compound, the content of the solvent in the photocurable composition can be greatly reduced. In that case, the content of the compound having an ether bond and / or an ester bond and having a liquid at 25 ° C.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention is preferably 5 to 1 part by weight with respect to 1 part by weight of the photopolymerization initiator (I). Since it can be arbitrarily selected in the range of 100 parts by mass, if necessary, the amount is as small as about 5 to 20 parts by mass, more preferably about 5 to 10 parts by mass with respect to 1 part by mass of the photopolymerization initiator (I). It is also possible to do.
  • the photocurable composition of the present invention further contains an inorganic filler, an adhesion promoter, an aggregation inhibitor, a polymerization terminator, a chain transfer agent, a leveling agent, a plasticizer, an antifoaming agent, and a silane coupling, if necessary.
  • Agent You may contain a ultraviolet absorber etc.
  • Color filter As a method for producing a color filter, it is preferable to use a method of forming a colored layer (pattern) having pores by photolithography using the photocurable composition of the present invention containing a colorant. With this method, for example, even when energy diffraction or the like occurs during the exposure, it is difficult to be affected by the influence. Therefore, it is possible to obtain a high-definition color filter in which holes are formed in a fine pattern in the colored layer.
  • Pattern formation method As a pattern forming method, a method performed by a photolithography method using the photocurable composition of the present invention will be described. About the method, if it is a method which can form a hole in a colored layer, it will not specifically limit. For example, after applying the photocurable composition of the present invention to a substrate and drying it, exposure is performed by irradiating energy using a photomask or the like provided with an opening and a shielding part, and then development is performed. Thus, a pattern is formed. By repeating this a plurality of times, for example, red, green, and blue patterns are formed on the substrate, and then a transparent electrode film such as indium tin oxide (ITO) is formed to manufacture a color filter.
  • ITO indium tin oxide
  • the coating method of the said photocurable composition can utilize for well-known coating methods, such as a spin coat method, spray coat, dip coat, roll coat, bead coat, bar coat. Drying after coating is usually preferably performed at 50 to 150 ° C. for 15 seconds to 10 minutes.
  • the light source used for the exposure can be the same as the light source generally used for the formation of the colored layer, but in the ultraviolet region such as an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp, a low pressure mercury lamp, a metal halide lamp, Lamps with high emission lines are preferred. Thereby, it becomes possible to exhibit the characteristic of the said photocurable composition more effectively.
  • the method for developing the photocurable composition is not particularly limited as long as the unnecessary portion of the photocurable composition can be removed. It can be made to be the same as the developing method performed at the time of manufacture. Here, for example, by optimizing the type of the developing solution, the concentration of the developing solution, the pressure of the developing solution or the washing water, and the like, the hole can be formed in a finer pattern.
  • substrate (transparent substrate) used for a general color filter can be used.
  • Specific examples include inflexible transparent rigid materials such as quartz glass, alkali-free glass, and synthetic quartz plates, or transparent flexible materials having flexibility such as transparent resin films and optical resin plates. It is done.
  • the thickness of the substrate is not particularly limited, but a substrate having a thickness of, for example, about 100 ⁇ m to 1 mm can be used depending on the use of the color filter of the present invention.
  • other steps may be appropriately included as necessary, such as a light shielding portion forming step for forming a light shielding portion and a step for forming an overcoat layer on the colored layer.
  • the liquid crystal display device of the present invention includes the above-described color filter of the present invention, a counter substrate, and a liquid crystal layer formed between the color filter and the counter substrate, and the configuration thereof is particularly limited. Instead, it can have the same configuration as a liquid crystal display device using a known color filter.
  • the liquid crystal display device 40 of the present invention has the obtained color filter 10 (display side substrate) and a counter substrate 20 having a TFT array substrate (liquid crystal drive side substrate) facing each other. When the inner peripheral edge of the substrate is joined with a sealant, the two substrates are bonded together while maintaining a cell gap of a predetermined distance.
  • An active matrix color liquid crystal display device belonging to the liquid crystal panel can be obtained by filling the liquid crystal layer 30 with the liquid crystal in the gap between the substrates and sealing it.
  • the color filter 10 of the present invention has a transparent substrate 1, a light shielding part 2, and a colored layer 3.
  • a driving method generally used for a liquid crystal display device can be adopted.
  • a TN method, an IPS method, an OCB method, an MVA method, and the like can be given.
  • the liquid crystal constituting the liquid crystal layer various liquid crystals having different dielectric anisotropies and mixtures thereof can be used depending on the driving method of the liquid crystal display device.
  • Example 2 Example 1 except that isobutyl acrylate (40 mmol) was used instead of ethyl acrylate (40 mmol) in Step 1 of Example 1, and 2-methylbenzoyl chloride (11 mmol) was used instead of benzoyl chloride (11 mmol) in Step 2. The same operation as in Example 1 was performed to obtain the following pale yellow solid compound (v). The physical properties of the compound (v) are shown below.
  • Example 3 In Step 1 of Example 1, 2-methoxyethyl acrylate (40 mmol) was used instead of ethyl acrylate (40 mmol), and in Step 2, 2-methylbenzoyl chloride (11 mmol) was used instead of benzoyl chloride (11 mmol). Except for this, the same operation as in Example 1 was carried out to obtain the following pale yellow solid compound (vi). The physical properties of the compound (vi) are shown below.
  • Example 4 (Process 1) Dissolve 5.0 g (30 mmol) of carbazole in 6 ml of dimethylformamide (DMF), add 13.2 g (150 mmol) of ethylene carbonate and 5.5 ml (037 mmol) of diazabicycloundecene (DBU) and add at 100 ° C. for 3 hours. Heated to reflux. After cooling, water was added, extracted with ethyl acetate, washed with water, and then the solvent was distilled off.
  • DMF dimethylformamide
  • DBU diazabicycloundecene
  • the obtained concentrate was diluted with 15 ml of acetonitrile, 2 g (23 mmol) of acetyl chloride and 4 ml (29 mmol) of triethylamine were added thereto, and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours. After completion of the reaction, water was added, extracted with ethyl acetate, washed with water, dried over magnesium sulfate, and the solvent was distilled off to obtain 6.0 g (yield) of the above compound (vii) as a pale yellow liquid. 80%).
  • reaction solution was poured into ice water, extracted with ethyl acetate, washed with water, saturated aqueous sodium hydrogen carbonate solution and saturated brine, dried over magnesium sulfate, and then the solvent was distilled off.
  • the photopolymerization initiator of the present invention is highly compatible with a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond, particularly a polyfunctional (meth) acrylate, and can also be used to prepare a solvent-free photopolymerization initiator. Is possible. At the same time, it can be seen that the photocurable composition containing the photopolymerization initiator of the present invention is more sensitive than the conventional photocurable composition containing the photopolymerization initiator.
  • the photopolymerization initiator of the present invention is superior in solubility with respect to various solvents, in particular, a liquid compound at 25 ° C. having an ether bond and / or an ester bond, as compared with the conventional photopolymerization initiator. Recognize.
  • the photopolymerization initiator “N-1919” used in Comparative Test Example 4 has higher solubility than the photopolymerization initiator “OXE02” used in Comparative Test Example 3. This is because “N-1919” has improved solubility by adding a substituent to the structure of “OXE02”.
  • the compounds (iv) to (vi), (x) and (xii) used in Test Examples 6 to 10 not only have higher solubility in the solvent than “N-1919”, but also have a smaller molecular weight. Thus, the content in the photocurable composition can be reduced, and the photopolymerization initiator is more excellent.
  • the obtained binder resin had a solid content concentration of 38% by mass, an acid value of 75 mgKOH / g, and a weight average molecular weight of 10,000.
  • sensitivity In the exposure step, the exposure amount is set to 100 mJ / cm 2 or 200 mJ / cm 2, and the film thickness after development and post-baking in the region irradiated with light is 95% or more with respect to 100% of the film thickness before exposure. In such a case, “the film thickness was sufficient” was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria.
  • B An exposure amount of 100 mJ / cm 2 was insufficient, but an exposure amount of 200 mJ / cm 2 provided a sufficient film thickness.
  • the film thickness was measured using a stylus-type film thickness measuring device “SURFCORDER ET4000A” (manufactured by Kosaka Laboratory Ltd.).
  • resolution The resolution was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria. a: A favorable pattern was obtained even when the line width was less than 10 ⁇ m during exposure and development. b: A good pattern was obtained when the line width was 15 to 20 ⁇ m.
  • Developability At the time of exposure, the residue of an unexposed part (part which was not irradiated with light) was observed, and developability was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria. ⁇ : No residue was confirmed. X: A residue was confirmed.
  • Adhesion The line width of the independent pattern that was in close contact without being washed after development was investigated, and the adhesion was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria.
  • Example 6 Preparation and pattern formation of blue light curable resin composition
  • Each component described in Table 6 was mixed in each compounding amount and stirred for 1 hour with a dissolver to prepare a blue light curable resin composition.
  • the obtained blue light curable resin composition was spin coated on a glass substrate and heated at 80 ° C. for 3 minutes to form a coating film of the blue light curable resin composition.
  • the obtained coating film is exposed with a high-pressure mercury lamp as a light source from the coating film side through a mask having a predetermined line width, and then spray development is performed using Disperse H (manufactured by Henkel) diluted 100 times. After the completion, post baking was performed at 230 ° C. for 30 minutes to form a pattern.
  • Table 9 shows the evaluation results of sensitivity, resolution, developability and adhesion.
  • Example 6 instead of the compound (iv) obtained in Example 1, the “IRGACURE OXE02” (Ciba Specialty Chemicals ( Co., Ltd.) or “N-1919” (manufactured by ADEKA Co., Ltd.) was used in the same manner to prepare a blue light curable resin composition to form a pattern.
  • Table 9 shows the evaluation results of sensitivity, resolution, developability and adhesion.
  • Example 7 Preparation of red light curable resin composition and pattern formation Each component described in Table 7 was mixed at each blending amount and stirred for 1 hour with a dissolver to prepare a red photocurable resin composition. About the obtained red photocurable resin composition, the pattern was formed by performing operation similar to Example 6.
  • FIG. Table 9 shows the evaluation results of sensitivity, resolution, developability and adhesion.
  • Example 7 Preparation and pattern formation of red photocurable resin composition
  • the “IRGACURE OXE02” Ciba Specialty Chemicals ( Co., Ltd.) or “N-1919” (manufactured by ADEKA Co., Ltd.) was used in the same manner to prepare a red photocurable resin composition to form a pattern.
  • Table 9 shows the evaluation results of sensitivity, resolution, developability and adhesion.
  • Example 8 Preparation and pattern formation of green light curable resin composition
  • Each component shown in Table 8 was mixed in each compounding amount and stirred for 1 hour with a dissolver to prepare a green light curable resin composition.
  • the pattern was formed by performing operation similar to Example 6.
  • FIG. Table 9 shows the evaluation results of sensitivity, resolution, developability and adhesion.
  • Example 8 Preparation and pattern formation of green light curable resin composition
  • the “IRGACURE OXE02” Ciba Specialty Chemicals ( Co., Ltd.) or “N-1919” (manufactured by ADEKA Co., Ltd.) was used in the same manner to prepare a green light curable resin composition to form a pattern.
  • Table 9 shows the evaluation results of sensitivity, resolution, developability and adhesion.
  • Examples 9 to 11 In each of Examples 6 to 8, a blue light curable resin composition was prepared in the same manner except that the compound (v) obtained in Example 2 was used instead of the compound (iv) obtained in Example 1. A red light curable resin composition and a green light curable resin composition were prepared, and a pattern was formed. Table 9 shows the evaluation results of sensitivity, resolution, developability and adhesion.
  • Examples 12 to 14> In each of Examples 6 to 8, a blue light curable resin composition was prepared in the same manner except that the compound (vi) obtained in Example 3 was used instead of the compound (iv) obtained in Example 1. A red light curable resin composition and a green light curable resin composition were prepared, and a pattern was formed. Table 9 shows the evaluation results of sensitivity, resolution, developability and adhesion.
  • Examples 15 to 17> In each of Examples 6 to 8, a blue light curable resin composition was prepared in the same manner except that the compound (x) obtained in Example 4 was used instead of the compound (iv) obtained in Example 1. A red light curable resin composition and a green light curable resin composition were prepared, and a pattern was formed. Table 9 shows the evaluation results of sensitivity, resolution, developability and adhesion.
  • Examples 18 to 20> In each of Examples 6 to 8, a blue light curable resin composition was prepared in the same manner except that the compound (xii) obtained in Example 5 was used instead of the compound (iv) obtained in Example 1. A red light curable resin composition and a green light curable resin composition were prepared, and a pattern was formed. Table 9 shows the evaluation results of sensitivity, resolution, developability and adhesion.
  • the photocurable composition containing the photopolymerization initiator of the present invention has developability equivalent to that of the conventional photocurable composition containing the photopolymerization initiator, and also has sensitivity, resolution and About adhesiveness, it turns out that it is superior to the photocurable composition containing the conventional photoinitiator. From this, it can be said that the photocurable composition containing the photoinitiator of this invention is excellent in deep part sclerosis
  • the photopolymerization initiator of the present invention has high sensitivity to light (especially light having a short wavelength of 450 nm or less), it can be thinned and can form a high-quality pattern at low cost. Furthermore, photopolymerization starts to be incorporated into the photocurable composition for color filters due to its high compatibility with compounds having ethylenically unsaturated bonds (especially compounds having (meth) acryloyloxy groups) and high solubility in solvents. It is useful as a photopolymerization initiator to be contained in a photo-curable composition for a black matrix having a high light-shielding property.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • Structural Engineering (AREA)
  • Architecture (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
  • Polymerisation Methods In General (AREA)
  • Indole Compounds (AREA)
  • Materials For Photolithography (AREA)
  • Low-Molecular Organic Synthesis Reactions Using Catalysts (AREA)
  • Optical Filters (AREA)

Abstract

Disclosed is a photopolymerization initiator which exhibits: high compatibility with compounds which have an ethylenically unsaturated bond in a photocurable composition, and compounds which are liquid at 25℃ and which have an ether bond and/or an ester bond; high solubility in solvents; high sensitivity to light (especially short wavelength light having a wavelength of 450nm or below); and no contamination of polymers or devices by decomposition products generated by light exposure. The photopolymerization initiator, which has the structure outlined below, provides a photocurable composition which exhibits excellent definition, development properties, deep curing properties, and adhesion to substrates. Also disclosed are a photocurable composition containing said photopolymerization initiator, a pattern formation method using said photocurable composition, a colour filter using said photocurable composition, and an LCD device having said colour filter. Further disclosed is a low cost and simple manufacturing method for the photopolymerization initiator. (In the formula, R1-R11 represent hydrogen atoms, alkyl groups, or the like. R3 can form a ring together with R4 or R5. R4 can form a ring together with R5. Ar represents an aryl group or a heteroaryl group. W represents a single bond or an oxygen atom. Z represents a single bond, an oxygen atom, or >NR3' (R3' represents an alkyl group, or R3' joins with R3 and forms a ring with a nitrogen atom). n represents an integer from 1-10. When n is an integer from 2-10, R4 and R5 can each be the same or different.)

Description

光重合開始剤、光硬化性組成物、パターン形成方法、カラーフィルタ、液晶表示装置、及び光重合開始剤の製造方法Photopolymerization initiator, photocurable composition, pattern forming method, color filter, liquid crystal display device, and method for producing photopolymerization initiator
 本発明は、光重合開始剤、光硬化性組成物、該組成物を用いたパターン形成方法、該組成物を用いたカラーフィルタ、該カラーフィルタを有する液晶表示装置、及び光重合開始剤の製造方法に関する。さらに詳しくは、光硬化性組成物中のエチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物、エーテル結合及び/又はエステル結合を有する25℃で液体の化合物との相溶性、及び溶剤(前記のエーテル結合及び/又はエステル結合を有する25℃で液体の化合物を含む。)に対する溶解性が高く、光(特に波長450nm以下の短波長の光)に対する感度が高く、露光時の光により発生する分解物による重合物の汚染や装置の汚染が無い光重合開始剤であって、解像度、現像性、深部硬化性及び基板との密着性が良好となる光硬化性組成物を提供する光重合開始剤、該光重合開始剤を含有する光硬化性組成物、該光硬化性組成物を用いたパターン形成方法、該光硬化性組成物を用いたカラーフィルタ、該カラーフィルタを有する液晶表示装置、及び前記光重合開始剤の製造方法に関する。 The present invention relates to a photopolymerization initiator, a photocurable composition, a pattern formation method using the composition, a color filter using the composition, a liquid crystal display device having the color filter, and production of a photopolymerization initiator. Regarding the method. More specifically, a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, an ether bond and / or an ester bond and a liquid compound at 25 ° C. which is liquid at 25 ° C., and a solvent (the aforementioned ether bond and / or A compound having an ester bond and a liquid compound at 25 ° C.), a high sensitivity to light (especially light having a short wavelength of 450 nm or less), and a polymer produced by a decomposition product generated by light during exposure. A photopolymerization initiator that is free from contamination or equipment contamination, and that provides a photocurable composition that provides good resolution, developability, deep curability, and adhesion to a substrate, and the photopolymerization initiation Curable composition containing an agent, a pattern formation method using the photocurable composition, a color filter using the photocurable composition, a liquid crystal display device having the color filter, and the light Process for the preparation of initiator.
 光硬化性樹脂組成物は、例えばバインダー樹脂や重合性モノマー及び光重合開始剤を含有するものであり、光(粒子線等の放射線を含む電磁波)を照射することにより重合硬化させることができるので、光硬化性インキ、感光性印刷版、カラーフィルタ、各種フォトレジスト等に用いられる。光硬化性樹脂組成物を硬化させる光としては、その取り扱いのし易さや感度等の点から、450nm以下の波長の光(紫外線)が用いられる場合が多く、その光源としては波長365nm、405nm、436nmの波長に強い発光を有する高圧水銀灯や、KrF及びArF等のエキシマレーザーが利用されている。また、より微細なパターン形成に用いられる場合に、電子線やEUV(極端紫外光:Extreme  Ultra Violet)等の波長の短い電磁波や放射線の適用が検討されている。
 光による硬化は、熱硬化に比べて省エネルギーであることや、フォトマスクを介して照射を行うことにより所望のパターンで硬化できることなどから、種々の用途分野において需要が高く、特に生産性が向上し、かつ光重合開始剤の添加量を削減し得る高感度の光重合性開始剤に対して、需要が高まっている。
 また、顔料分散法を用いたカラーフィルタは、通常、分散剤等により顔料を分散してなる顔料分散液に光硬化性組成物をガラス基板に塗布して乾燥後、フォトマスクを用いて露光し、現像を行うことによって着色パターンを形成し、加熱することによりパターンを固着して画素を形成する。これらの工程を、各色ごとに繰り返してカラーフィルタを形成する。このようなカラーフィルタの画像形成に用いられる光硬化性組成物には、十分な解像性、基板との密着性及び低現像残渣等の特性が求められる。
 さらに近年では、色濃度が高い画素やそれ自体が遮光層として機能する光学濃度の高いブラックマトリックス用レジストが利用されており、光硬化性組成物中の着色顔料やカーボンブラック等の黒色顔料の含有量が高くなり、光硬化性組成物の光透過性が下がる傾向にある。その結果、露光光源からの光が、光硬化性樹脂塗膜の深部まで到達せず、解像性、基板との密着性及び現像性等が悪化するという問題があり、生産性や、カラーフィルタに要求される精度、さらには信頼性が低下する。
 また、カラーフィルタが形成されるガラス基板は年々大型化しており、大面積露光が行われているため、露光照度が小さくなる傾向があることや、更なる生産性向上のために露光時間の短縮が求められていることから、より高感度の光重合開始剤が必要とされている。
 そこで、高感度及び高解像度等を達成し得る光硬化性組成物を得る方法として、光重合開始剤としてオキシムエステル化合物を用いることが提案されている(特許文献1~5参照)。
The photocurable resin composition contains, for example, a binder resin, a polymerizable monomer, and a photopolymerization initiator, and can be polymerized and cured by irradiation with light (electromagnetic waves including radiation such as particle beams). , Photocurable inks, photosensitive printing plates, color filters, various photoresists, and the like. As light for curing the photocurable resin composition, light (ultraviolet light) having a wavelength of 450 nm or less is often used from the viewpoint of easy handling and sensitivity, and the light source has wavelengths of 365 nm, 405 nm, High pressure mercury lamps having strong emission at a wavelength of 436 nm and excimer lasers such as KrF and ArF are used. In addition, when used for forming a finer pattern, the application of electromagnetic waves or radiation having a short wavelength such as an electron beam or EUV (Extreme Ultra Violet) has been studied.
Curing with light is more energy-saving than heat-curing and can be cured in a desired pattern by irradiating it through a photomask. In addition, there is an increasing demand for highly sensitive photopolymerizable initiators that can reduce the amount of photopolymerization initiator added.
Color filters using the pigment dispersion method are usually exposed to light using a photomask after the photocurable composition is coated on a glass substrate in a pigment dispersion obtained by dispersing the pigment with a dispersant or the like, dried. A colored pattern is formed by developing, and the pattern is fixed by heating to form a pixel. These steps are repeated for each color to form a color filter. The photocurable composition used for image formation of such a color filter is required to have characteristics such as sufficient resolution, adhesion to a substrate and low development residue.
Furthermore, in recent years, pixels with high color density and black matrix resists with high optical density, which themselves function as light-shielding layers, have been used, and the inclusion of black pigments such as colored pigments and carbon black in photocurable compositions. The amount increases and the light transmittance of the photocurable composition tends to decrease. As a result, the light from the exposure light source does not reach the deep part of the photo-curable resin coating film, and there is a problem that the resolution, adhesion to the substrate, developability, etc. are deteriorated. The accuracy and further reliability required for the above are reduced.
In addition, the glass substrate on which the color filter is formed is getting larger year by year, and since the large area exposure is performed, the exposure illuminance tends to decrease and the exposure time is shortened for further productivity improvement. Therefore, a more sensitive photopolymerization initiator is required.
Therefore, as a method for obtaining a photocurable composition that can achieve high sensitivity and high resolution, it has been proposed to use an oxime ester compound as a photopolymerization initiator (see Patent Documents 1 to 5).
特許第3860170号明細書Japanese Patent No. 3860170 特開2006-036750号公報JP 2006-036750 A 特許第3992725号明細書Japanese Patent No. 3993725 特開2010-037542号公報JP 2010-037542 A 韓国公開特許第2009-0046108号公報Korean Public Patent No. 2009-0046108
 特許文献1~5に記載の光重合開始剤では、感度、解像度、現像性、及び相溶性や溶解性、特に光硬化性組成物中のエチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物(特に(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基を有する化合物)との相溶性や溶剤に対する溶解性が不十分であり、使用条件に制限があるため、さらなる改善の余地がある。また、特許文献1~5に記載の光重合開始剤では、露光時の光により発生する分解物がマスクに付着し、その結果、焼付け時のパターン形成不良を起こし、収率の低下を招くことがあった。そこで、発生した分解物が、重合物や装置等を汚染しない光重合開始剤が望まれている。 In the photopolymerization initiators described in Patent Documents 1 to 5, compounds having an ethylenically unsaturated bond (especially (meth) acryloyl) in photocurable compositions, such as sensitivity, resolution, developability, and compatibility and solubility. There is room for further improvement since the compatibility with a compound having an oxy group) and the solubility in a solvent are insufficient, and the use conditions are limited. In addition, in the photopolymerization initiators described in Patent Documents 1 to 5, decomposition products generated by light at the time of exposure adhere to the mask, resulting in pattern formation failure during printing and a decrease in yield. was there. Therefore, a photopolymerization initiator is desired in which the generated decomposition product does not contaminate the polymer or apparatus.
 よって、本発明の課題は、光硬化性組成物中のエチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物(特に(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基を有する化合物)、エーテル結合及び/又はエステル結合を有する25℃で液体の化合物との相溶性、及び溶剤(前記のエーテル結合及び/又はエステル結合を有する25℃で液体の化合物を含む。)に対する溶解性が高く、光(特に波長450nm以下の短波長の光)に対する感度が高く、露光時の光により発生する分解物による重合物の汚染や装置の汚染が無い光重合開始剤であって、解像度、現像性、深部硬化性及び基板との密着性が良好となる光硬化性組成物を提供し得る光重合開始剤を提供することである。また、該光重合開始剤を含有する光硬化性組成物、該光硬化性組成物を用いたパターン形成方法、該光硬化性組成物を用いたカラーフィルタ及び該カラーフィルタを有する液晶表示装置を提供することである。さらには、前記光重合開始剤を低コストで簡便に製造する方法を提供することである。 Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond (particularly a compound having a (meth) acryloyloxy group), an ether bond and / or an ester bond in a photocurable composition at 25 ° C. High compatibility with compounds and high solubility in solvents (including compounds that are ether-bonded and / or ester-bonded and liquid at 25 ° C.) and sensitivity to light (especially light having a short wavelength of 450 nm or less) Is a photopolymerization initiator that is high and has no contamination of polymer or equipment due to decomposition products generated by light at the time of exposure, and has good resolution, developability, deep curability and adhesion to the substrate. It is providing the photoinitiator which can provide a curable composition. Further, a photocurable composition containing the photopolymerization initiator, a pattern forming method using the photocurable composition, a color filter using the photocurable composition, and a liquid crystal display device having the color filter Is to provide. Furthermore, it is providing the method of manufacturing the said photoinitiator simply at low cost.
 本発明者は、前記課題を達成するために鋭意研究を重ねた結果、後述する一般式(I-a)で表される特定構造の光重合開始剤であれば、前記課題を解決し得ることを見出した。
 すなわち、本発明は、下記[1]~[23]に関する。
[1]下記一般式(I)で表される光重合開始剤。
As a result of intensive studies to achieve the above-mentioned problems, the present inventor can solve the above-mentioned problems as long as it is a photopolymerization initiator having a specific structure represented by the general formula (Ia) described later. I found.
That is, the present invention relates to the following [1] to [23].
[1] A photopolymerization initiator represented by the following general formula (I).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
(式中、R1~R11は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~10のシクロアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数4~20のシクロアルケニル基、ヒドロキシル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルコキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニルオキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルカノイル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケノイル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基又は置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~14のヘテロ環基を示す。R3は、R4又はR5と一緒になって環を形成していてもよい。R4は、R5と一緒になって環を形成していてもよい。
 また、Arは、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基又は置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数5~14のヘテロアリール基を示す。
 Wは、単結合又は酸素原子を示す。Zは、単結合、酸素原子又は>NR3’(R3’は、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基を示すか、又はR3’はR3とつながって、窒素原子と共に環を形成している。)を示す。
 nは、1~10の整数を示す。nが2~10の整数の場合、複数のR4及びR5は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。)
[2]下記一般式(I-a)で表される、上記[1]に記載の光重合開始剤。
(Wherein R 1 to R 11 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted Or an unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 ring atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, a hydroxyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or Unsubstituted alkenyloxy group having 2-20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkanoyl group having 1-20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkenoyl group having 2-20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted ring carbon atoms 6 .R 3 that an aryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group ring atoms 3 to 14 of to 14, to form a ring together with R 4 or R 5 Good .R 4 may form a ring together with R 5.
Ar represents a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms or a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl group having 5 to 14 ring atoms.
W represents a single bond or an oxygen atom. Z represents a single bond, an oxygen atom, or> NR 3 ′ (R 3 ′ represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or R 3 ′ is connected to R 3 together with a nitrogen atom. Forming a ring).
n represents an integer of 1 to 10. When n is an integer of 2 to 10, the plurality of R 4 and R 5 may be the same or different. )
[2] The photopolymerization initiator according to the above [1], represented by the following general formula (Ia):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
(式中、R1~R11は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~10のシクロアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数4~20のシクロアルケニル基、ヒドロキシル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルコキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニルオキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルカノイル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケノイル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基又は置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~14のヘテロ環基を示す。R3は、R4又はR5と一緒になって環を形成していてもよい。R4は、R5と一緒になって環を形成していてもよい。
 また、Arは、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基又は置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数5~14のヘテロアリール基を示す。
 nは、1~10の整数を示す。nが2~10の整数の場合、複数のR4及びR5は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。)
[3]前記一般式(I-a)中、R1、R2及びR3が、それぞれ独立に、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、nが2であり、複数のR4及びR5が、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、Arが、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基である、上記[2]に記載の光重合開始剤。
[4]前記一般式(I-a)中、R1、R2及びR3が、それぞれ独立に、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、nが2であり、複数のR4及びR5が、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、Arが、置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数5~14のヘテロアリール基である、上記[2]に記載の光重合開始剤。
[5]分子量が515以下である、上記[3]又は[4]に記載の光重合開始剤。
(Wherein R 1 to R 11 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted Or an unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 ring atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, a hydroxyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or Unsubstituted alkenyloxy group having 2-20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkanoyl group having 1-20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkenoyl group having 2-20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted ring carbon atoms 6 .R 3 that an aryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group ring atoms 3 to 14 of to 14, to form a ring together with R 4 or R 5 Good .R 4 may form a ring together with R 5.
Ar represents a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms or a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl group having 5 to 14 ring atoms.
n represents an integer of 1 to 10. When n is an integer of 2 to 10, the plurality of R 4 and R 5 may be the same or different. )
[3] In the general formula (Ia), R 1 , R 2 and R 3 are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, n is 2, R 4 and R 5 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and Ar is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms. The photopolymerization initiator according to [2] above.
[4] In the general formula (Ia), R 1 , R 2 and R 3 are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, n is 2, Each of R 4 and R 5 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and Ar represents a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl group having 5 to 14 ring atoms. The photopolymerization initiator according to [2] above.
[5] The photopolymerization initiator according to the above [3] or [4], which has a molecular weight of 515 or less.
[6]前記一般式(I-a)中、R1及びR2が、それぞれ独立に、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、R3が置換もしくは無置換の炭素数3~18のシクロアルキル基であり、nが2であり、複数のR4及びR5が、それぞれ独立に水素原子もしくは置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基である、上記[2]に記載の光重合開始剤。
[7]前記一般式(I-a)中、R1及びR2が、それぞれ独立に、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、R3が環形成原子数3~6の環状エーテル基で置換された炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、nが2であり、複数のR4及びR5が、それぞれ独立に水素原子もしくは置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基である、上記[2]に記載の光重合開始剤。
[8]分子量が550以下である、上記[6]又は[7]に記載の光重合開始剤。
[9]下記一般式(I-b)で表される、上記[1]に記載の光重合開始剤。
[6] In the general formula (Ia), R 1 and R 2 are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and R 3 is a substituted or unsubstituted carbon number. A cycloalkyl group having 3 to 18; n is 2; and the plurality of R 4 and R 5 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. ] The photoinitiator as described in.
[7] In the general formula (Ia), R 1 and R 2 are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and R 3 is 3 to 6 ring atoms. An alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms substituted with a cyclic ether group, n is 2, and a plurality of R 4 and R 5 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted carbon atom having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. The photopolymerization initiator according to [2], which is an alkyl group of
[8] The photopolymerization initiator according to the above [6] or [7], which has a molecular weight of 550 or less.
[9] The photopolymerization initiator according to [1], which is represented by the following general formula (Ib).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
(式中、R1~R11は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~10のシクロアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数4~20のシクロアルケニル基、ヒドロキシル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルコキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニルオキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルカノイル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケノイル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基又は置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~14のヘテロ環基を示す。
 Arは、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基又は置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数5~14のヘテロアリール基を示す。
 Wは、単結合又は酸素原子を示す。Zは、単結合、酸素原子又は>NR3’(R3’は、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基を示すか、又はR3’はR3とつながって、窒素原子と共に環を形成している。)を示す。)
(Wherein R 1 to R 11 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted Or an unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 ring atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, a hydroxyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or Unsubstituted alkenyloxy group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkanoyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkenoyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted ring forming carbon number A 6 to 14 aryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 3 to 14 ring atoms is shown.
Ar represents a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms or a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl group having 5 to 14 ring atoms.
W represents a single bond or an oxygen atom. Z represents a single bond, an oxygen atom, or> NR 3 ′ (R 3 ′ represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or R 3 ′ is connected to R 3 together with a nitrogen atom. Forming a ring). )
[10]前記一般式(I-b)中、R1及びR3が、それぞれ独立に、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、Wが酸素原子であり、Zが単結合又は酸素原子であり、Arが、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基である、上記[9]に記載の光重合開始剤。
[11]さらに、R2が、-OCOR13(R13は、炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基を示す。)又は-COOR20(R20は、炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基を示す。)で表されるエステル基を有する炭素数1~20のアルキル基である、上記[10]に記載の光重合開始剤。
[12]前記一般式(I-b)中、R1及びR3が、それぞれ独立に、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、Wが単結合であり、Zが>NR3’(R3’は、前記定義のとおりである。)であり、Arが、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基である、上記[9]に記載の光重合開始剤。
[13]さらに、R2が、-OCOR13(R13は、炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基を示す。)又は-COOR20(R20は、炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基を示す。)で表されるエステル基を有する炭素数1~20のアルキル基である、上記[12]に記載の光重合開始剤。
[14]バインダー樹脂及び/又はエチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物と、上記[1]~[13]のいずれかに記載の光重合開始剤を含有する光硬化性組成物。
[15]光重合開始剤の含有量が、光硬化性組成物の固形分に対して2~50質量%である、上記[14]に記載の光硬化性組成物。
[16]さらに色材を含有する、上記[14]又は[15]に記載の光硬化性組成物。
[17]さらに、エーテル結合及び/又はエステル結合を有する25℃で液体の化合物を光重合開始剤1質量部に対して5~100質量部含有する、上記[14]~[16]のいずれかに記載の光硬化性組成物。
[18]エチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物として、エーテル結合及び/又はエステル結合を持つエチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物を少なくとも1種用い、溶剤を光硬化性組成物全量の10質量%以下のみ含有する、上記[14]~[16]のいずれかに記載の光硬化性組成物。
[19]カラーフィルタ用である、上記[16]~[18]のいずれかに記載の光硬化性組成物。
[20]上記[16]~[18]のいずれかに記載の光硬化性組成物を用いたカラーフィルタ。
[21]上記[20]に記載のカラーフィルタと対向基板と、前記カラーフィルタと前記対向基板との間に形成された液晶層とを有する液晶表示装置。
[22]上記[16]~[18]のいずれかに記載の光硬化性組成物を基板に塗布し、乾燥した後、フォトマスクを用いて露光し、次いで現像を行うことによる、パターン形成方法。
[23]下記一般式(1)
[10] In the general formula (Ib), R 1 and R 3 are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, W is an oxygen atom, and Z is a single atom. The photopolymerization initiator according to [9] above, which is a bond or an oxygen atom, and Ar is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms.
[11] Further, R 2 represents —OCOR 13 (R 13 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms) or —COOR 20 (R 20 represents carbon The alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or the aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms). The photopolymerization according to the above [10], which is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms having an ester group represented by: Initiator.
[12] In the general formula (Ib), R 1 and R 3 are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, W is a single bond, and Z is> The photopolymerization according to the above [9], wherein NR 3 ′ (R 3 ′ is as defined above), and Ar is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms. Initiator.
[13] Furthermore, R 2 represents —OCOR 13 (R 13 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms) or —COOR 20 (R 20 represents carbon The photopolymerization according to the above [12], which is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an ester group having an ester group represented by: Initiator.
[14] A photocurable composition comprising a binder resin and / or a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, and the photopolymerization initiator according to any one of [1] to [13].
[15] The photocurable composition as described in [14] above, wherein the content of the photopolymerization initiator is 2 to 50% by mass with respect to the solid content of the photocurable composition.
[16] The photocurable composition according to the above [14] or [15], further containing a coloring material.
[17] Any of [14] to [16] above, further containing 5 to 100 parts by mass of a compound having an ether bond and / or an ester bond at 25 ° C. with respect to 1 part by mass of the photopolymerization initiator The photocurable composition as described in 2. above.
[18] As the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, at least one compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond having an ether bond and / or an ester bond is used, and the solvent is only 10% by mass or less of the total amount of the photocurable composition. The photocurable composition according to any one of the above [14] to [16], which is contained.
[19] The photocurable composition according to any one of [16] to [18], which is used for a color filter.
[20] A color filter using the photocurable composition according to any one of [16] to [18].
[21] A liquid crystal display device comprising the color filter according to [20], a counter substrate, and a liquid crystal layer formed between the color filter and the counter substrate.
[22] A pattern forming method comprising applying the photocurable composition according to any one of [16] to [18] to a substrate, drying the substrate, exposing the substrate using a photomask, and then developing the pattern. .
[23] The following general formula (1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
(式中、R6~R11は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~10のシクロアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数4~20のシクロアルケニル基、ヒドロキシル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルコキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニルオキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルカノイル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケノイル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基又は置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~14のヘテロ環基を示す。)
で表されるカルバゾール誘導体と、下記一般式(2a)
(Wherein R 6 to R 11 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted Or an unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 ring atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, a hydroxyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or Unsubstituted alkenyloxy group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkanoyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkenoyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted ring forming carbon number Represents a 6 to 14 aryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 3 to 14 ring atoms.)
A carbazole derivative represented by the following general formula (2a)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
(式中、R3、R4’及びR5’は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~10のシクロアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数4~20のシクロアルケニル基、ヒドロキシル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルコキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニルオキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルカノイル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケノイル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基又は置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~14のヘテロ環基を示す。R3は、R5’と一緒になって環を形成していてもよい。)
で表されるアクリレート誘導体とを塩基の存在下に反応させることにより、下記一般式(3a’)
Wherein R 3 , R 4 ′ and R 5 ′ are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted carbon number 2 to 20 Alkenyl group, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 ring atoms, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, hydroxyl group, substituted or unsubstituted 1 to 20 carbon atoms Alkoxy group, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyloxy group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkanoyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkenoyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted .R 3 showing a heterocyclic group having ring carbon atoms of 6 to 14 aryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted ring atoms from 3 to 14, to form a ring together with R 5 ' And it may be.)
Is reacted with an acrylate derivative represented by the following general formula (3a ′):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
(式中、R3、R4’、R5’、R6~R11は、前記定義の通りである。)
で表されるカルボニルアルキル基導入体を得、得られたカルボニルアルキル基導入体と下記一般式(4)、(5)
(Wherein R 3 , R 4 ′, R 5 ′ and R 6 to R 11 are as defined above.)
A carbonylalkyl group-introduced product represented by the following general formula (4), (5)
(式中、Xは、ハロゲン原子又は-OC(=O)Arを示し、X’は、ハロゲン原子又は-OC(=O)R2を示す。
 Arは、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基又は置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数5~14のヘテロアリール基を示す。
 R2は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~10のシクロアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数4~20のシクロアルケニル基、ヒドロキシル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルコキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニルオキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルカノイル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケノイル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基又は置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~14のヘテロ環基を示す。)
で表される2つのアシル化剤をルイス酸の存在下に反応させることにより、下記一般式(6a’)
(Wherein X represents a halogen atom or —OC (═O) Ar, and X ′ represents a halogen atom or —OC (═O) R 2 .
Ar represents a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms or a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl group having 5 to 14 ring atoms.
R 2 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted ring atom having 3 to 10 ring atoms. A cycloalkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, a hydroxyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyloxy having 2 to 20 carbon atoms Group, substituted or unsubstituted alkanoyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkenoyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms, or substituted or unsubstituted And a heterocyclic group having 3 to 14 ring atoms. )
Is reacted in the presence of a Lewis acid to give the following general formula (6a ′):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
(式中、R2、R3、R4’、R5’、R6~R11及びArは、前記定義の通りである。)
で表されるジケトン体を得、得られたジケトン体とヒドロキシルアミンを反応させることにより、下記一般式(7a’)
(Wherein R 2 , R 3 , R 4 ′, R 5 ′, R 6 to R 11 and Ar are as defined above.)
A diketone product represented by the following general formula (7a ′) is obtained by reacting the resulting diketone product with hydroxylamine.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
(式中、R2、R3、R4’、R5’、R6~R11及びArは、前記定義の通りである。)
で表されるオキシム体を得、得られたオキシム体と下記一般式(8)
(Wherein R 2 , R 3 , R 4 ′, R 5 ′, R 6 to R 11 and Ar are as defined above.)
The oxime body represented by the following formula (8)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
(式中、Yは、ハロゲン原子又は-OC(=O)R1を示す。
 また、R1は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~10のシクロアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数4~20のシクロアルケニル基、ヒドロキシル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルコキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニルオキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルカノイル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケノイル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基又は置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~14のヘテロ環基を示す。)
で表されるエステル化剤とを反応させることによる、下記一般式(I-a1)
Wherein Y represents a halogen atom or —OC (═O) R 1 .
R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atom number of 3 -10 cycloalkyl group, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, hydroxyl group, substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted 2 to 20 carbon atoms An alkenyloxy group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkanoyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenoyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms, An unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 3 to 14 ring atoms is shown. )
By reacting with an esterifying agent represented by the following general formula (I-a1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
(式中、R1~R3、R4’、R5’、R6~R11及びArは、前記定義の通りである。)
で表される光重合開始剤の製造方法。
(Wherein R 1 to R 3 , R 4 ′, R 5 ′, R 6 to R 11 and Ar are as defined above.)
The manufacturing method of the photoinitiator represented by these.
 本発明の光重合開始剤は、光(特に450nm以下の短波長の光であって、例えば波長365nmや波長405nmの光)に対する感度が非常に高いため、薄膜化することが可能であり、低コストで高品質のパターンを形成することができる。さらに、エチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する化合物、エーテル結合及び/又はエステル結合を有する25℃で液体の化合物との相溶性、及び溶剤(前記のエーテル結合及び/又はエステル結合を有する25℃で液体の化合物を含む。)に対する溶解性が高いため、無溶剤の光硬化性組成物を調製することもでき、また、カラーフィルタ用の光硬化性組成物においては、光重合開始剤の添加量の選択幅が広く、結果として、感度、解像度、現像性及び深部硬化性が向上する。
 従来、光重合開始剤に種々の置換基を付与することにより分子量を高めながら溶剤への溶解性が高められてきたが、本発明の光重合開始剤は、比較的分子量が小さく、光硬化性組成物への添加量を低減できるうえ、従来の光重合開始剤よりもエチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する化合物、エーテル結合及び/又はエステル結合を有する25℃で液体の化合物との相溶性、及び溶剤(前記のエーテル結合及び/又はエステル結合を有する25℃で液体の化合物を含む。)に対する溶解性が高く、感度、解像度及び現像性、並びに基板との密着性に優れる。
The photopolymerization initiator of the present invention has a very high sensitivity to light (especially light having a short wavelength of 450 nm or less, for example, light having a wavelength of 365 nm or 405 nm), and thus can be thinned. A high-quality pattern can be formed at low cost. Furthermore, a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond, a compatibility with a liquid compound at 25 ° C. having an ether bond and / or an ester bond, and a solvent (at 25 ° C. having an ether bond and / or an ester bond as described above) It is possible to prepare a solvent-free photocurable composition because of its high solubility in liquid compounds.) In the photocurable composition for color filters, the amount of photopolymerization initiator added As a result, sensitivity, resolution, developability and deep part curability are improved.
Conventionally, the solubility in a solvent has been enhanced while increasing the molecular weight by adding various substituents to the photopolymerization initiator. However, the photopolymerization initiator of the present invention has a relatively small molecular weight and is photocurable. The amount added to the composition can be reduced, and the compatibility with a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond, an ether bond and / or an ester bond at 25 ° C., which is higher than that of a conventional photopolymerization initiator, And a solvent (including a compound that is liquid at 25 ° C. having the ether bond and / or ester bond described above), and is excellent in sensitivity, resolution, developability, and adhesion to a substrate.
本発明の液晶表示装置を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the liquid crystal display device of this invention.
[光重合開始剤]
 本発明の光重合開始剤は、下記一般式(I)で表される。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
(式中、R1~R11は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~10のシクロアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数4~20のシクロアルケニル基、ヒドロキシル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルコキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニルオキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルカノイル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケノイル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基又は置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~14のヘテロ環基を示す。R3は、R4又はR5と一緒になって環を形成していてもよい。R4は、R5と一緒になって環を形成していてもよい。
 また、Arは、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基又は置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数5~14のヘテロアリール基を示す。
 Wは、単結合又は酸素原子を示す。Zは、単結合、酸素原子又は>NR3’(R3’は、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基を示すか、又はR3’はR3とつながって、窒素原子と共に環を形成している。)を示す。
 nは、1~10の整数を示す。nが2~10の整数の場合、複数のR4及びR5は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。)
[Photopolymerization initiator]
The photopolymerization initiator of the present invention is represented by the following general formula (I).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
(Wherein R 1 to R 11 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted Or an unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 ring atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, a hydroxyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or Unsubstituted alkenyloxy group having 2-20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkanoyl group having 1-20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkenoyl group having 2-20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted ring carbon atoms 6 .R 3 that an aryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group ring atoms 3 to 14 of to 14, to form a ring together with R 4 or R 5 Good .R 4 may form a ring together with R 5.
Ar represents a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms or a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl group having 5 to 14 ring atoms.
W represents a single bond or an oxygen atom. Z represents a single bond, an oxygen atom, or> NR 3 ′ (R 3 ′ represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or R 3 ′ is connected to R 3 together with a nitrogen atom. Forming a ring).
n represents an integer of 1 to 10. When n is an integer of 2 to 10, the plurality of R 4 and R 5 may be the same or different. )
 また、一般式(I)で表される本発明の光重合開始剤の中でも、本発明の効果の観点から、下記一般式(I-a)で表される光重合開始剤(W:単結合、Z:酸素原子の場合に相当する。)及び下記一般式(I-b)で表される光重合開始剤(nが1の場合に相当する。)が好ましい。 Among the photopolymerization initiators of the present invention represented by the general formula (I), from the viewpoint of the effect of the present invention, a photopolymerization initiator represented by the following general formula (Ia) (W: single bond) , Z: corresponding to an oxygen atom) and a photopolymerization initiator represented by the following general formula (Ib) (corresponding to the case where n is 1) are preferred.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
 上記式中、R1~R11は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~10のシクロアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数4~20のシクロアルケニル基、ヒドロキシル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルコキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニルオキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルカノイル基、炭素数2~20のアルケノイル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基又は置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~14のヘテロ環基を示す。なお、一般式(I-a)においては、R3は、R4又はR5と一緒になって環を形成していてもよく、また、R4は、R5と一緒になって環を形成していてもよい。
 また、Arは、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基又は置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数5~14のヘテロアリール基を示す。
 一般式(I-b)中のWは、単結合又は酸素原子を示す。また、一般式(I-b)中のZは、単結合、酸素原子又は>NR3'(R3'は、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基を示すか、又はR3'はR3とつながって、窒素原子と共に環を形成している。)を示す。
 一般式(I-a)中のnは、1~10の整数を示す。nが2~10の整数の場合、複数のR4及びR5は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
In the above formula, R 1 to R 11 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted group Or an unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 ring atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, a hydroxyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or Unsubstituted alkenyloxy group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkanoyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, alkenoyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted aryl having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms And a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 3 to 14 ring atoms. In the general formula (I-a), R 3 together with R 4 or R 5 may form a ring, also, R 4 is a ring together with R 5 It may be formed.
Ar represents a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms or a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl group having 5 to 14 ring atoms.
W in the general formula (Ib) represents a single bond or an oxygen atom. In general formula (Ib), Z represents a single bond, an oxygen atom, or> NR 3 ′ (R 3 ′ represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or R 3 'Is connected to R 3 to form a ring with the nitrogen atom.
N in the general formula (Ia) represents an integer of 1 to 10. When n is an integer of 2 to 10, the plurality of R 4 and R 5 may be the same or different.
(一般式(I)、(I-a)及び(I-b)中の各基について)
 nとしては、低分子量とする観点、エチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する化合物との相溶性(以下、単に相溶性と称する。)や溶剤への溶解性(以下、単に溶解性と称する。)の観点及び製造容易性の観点から、2~8の整数が好ましく、2~4の整数がより好ましく、2がさらに好ましい。
 R1~R11がそれぞれ独立して示すハロゲン原子としては、例えばフッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子等が挙げられる。
 R1~R11がそれぞれ独立して示す炭素数1~20のアルキル基としては、直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよく、例えばメチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、イソプロピル基、n-ブチル基、イソブチル基、t-ブチル基、n-ペンチル基、イソペンチル基、n-ヘキシル基、n-オクチル基、2-エチル-n-オクチル基、n-デシル基、n-ドデシル基等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、低分子量とする観点、相溶性や溶解性の観点及び製造容易性の観点から、炭素数1~10のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~5のアルキル基がより好ましい。
 R1~R11がそれぞれ独立して示す炭素数2~20のアルケニル基としては、直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよく、例えばビニル基、アリル基、7-オクテニル基等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、低分子量とする観点、相溶性や溶解性の観点及び製造容易性の観点から、炭素数2~10のアルケニル基が好ましく、炭素数2~6のアルケニル基がより好ましい。
 R1~R11がそれぞれ独立して示す環形成原子数3~10のシクロアルキル基としては、シクロプロピル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基、シクロオクチル基等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、低分子量とする観点、相溶性や溶解性の観点及び製造容易性の観点から、環形成原子数3~6のシクロアルキル基が好ましい。
 R1~R11がそれぞれ独立して示す炭素数4~20のシクロアルケニル基としては、シクロペンテニル基、シクロヘキセニル基、シクロヘキサジエニル基、シクロオクテニル基等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、低分子量とする観点、相溶性や溶解性の観点及び製造容易性の観点から、炭素数4~10のシクロアルケニル基が好ましく、炭素数4~6のシクロアルケニル基がより好ましい。
(Regarding each group in general formulas (I), (Ia) and (Ib))
n represents a low molecular weight, is compatible with a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond (hereinafter simply referred to as “compatible”), and is soluble in a solvent (hereinafter simply referred to as “soluble”). In view of the above and the ease of production, an integer of 2 to 8 is preferable, an integer of 2 to 4 is more preferable, and 2 is more preferable.
Examples of the halogen atom independently represented by R 1 to R 11 include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
The alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms independently represented by R 1 to R 11 may be linear or branched, for example, methyl group, ethyl group, n-propyl group, isopropyl group, n-butyl Group, isobutyl group, t-butyl group, n-pentyl group, isopentyl group, n-hexyl group, n-octyl group, 2-ethyl-n-octyl group, n-decyl group, n-dodecyl group and the like. . Among these, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable, and an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms is more preferable from the viewpoint of low molecular weight, compatibility and solubility, and ease of production.
The alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms independently represented by R 1 to R 11 may be linear or branched, and examples thereof include a vinyl group, an allyl group, and a 7-octenyl group. Among these, an alkenyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms is preferred, and an alkenyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferred from the viewpoint of low molecular weight, compatibility and solubility, and ease of production.
Examples of the cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 ring atoms independently represented by R 1 to R 11 include a cyclopropyl group, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, and a cyclooctyl group. Among these, a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 6 ring atoms is preferable from the viewpoint of low molecular weight, compatibility and solubility, and ease of production.
Examples of the C 4-20 cycloalkenyl group independently represented by R 1 to R 11 include a cyclopentenyl group, a cyclohexenyl group, a cyclohexadienyl group, a cyclooctenyl group, and the like. Among these, a cycloalkenyl group having 4 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable, and a cycloalkenyl group having 4 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferable from the viewpoint of low molecular weight, compatibility and solubility, and ease of production.
 R1~R11がそれぞれ独立して示す炭素数1~20のアルコキシ基としては、アルキル基部位が、前記した炭素数1~20のアルキル基であるものが挙げられる。これらの中でも、低分子量とする観点、相溶性や溶解性の観点及び製造容易性の観点から、炭素数1~10のアルコキシ基が好ましく、炭素数1~5のアルコキシ基がより好ましい。
 R1~R11がそれぞれ独立して示す炭素数2~20のアルケニルオキシ基としては、アルケニル基部位が、前記した炭素数2~20のアルケニル基であるものが挙げられる。これらの中でも、低分子量とする観点、相溶性や溶解性の観点及び製造容易性の観点から、炭素数2~10のアルケニルオキシ基が好ましく、炭素数2~6のアルケニルオキシ基がより好ましい。
 R1~R11がそれぞれ独立して示す炭素数1~20のアルカノイル基としては、直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよく、例えばメタノイル基、エタノイル基、n-プロパノイル基、イソプロパノイル基、n-ブタノイル基、t-ブタノイル基、n-ヘキサノイル基、n-オクタノイル基、n-デカノイル基、n-ドデカノイル基等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、低分子量とする観点、相溶性や溶解性の観点及び製造容易性の観点から、炭素数1~10のアルカノイル基が好ましく、炭素数1~5のアルカノイル基がより好ましい。
 R1~R11がそれぞれ独立して示す炭素数2~20のアルケノイル基としては、直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよく、例えばエテノイル基、n-プロペノイル基、イソプロペノイル基、n-ブテノイル基、t-ブテノイル基、n-ヘキセノイル基、n-オクテノイル基、n-デセノイル基、n-ドデセノイル基等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、低分子量とする観点、相溶性や溶解性の観点及び製造容易性の観点から、炭素数2~10のアルケノイル基が好ましく、炭素数2~6のアルケノイル基がより好ましい。
Examples of the alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms independently represented by R 1 to R 11 include those in which the alkyl group moiety is the aforementioned alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. Among these, an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable, and an alkoxy group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms is more preferable from the viewpoint of low molecular weight, compatibility and solubility, and ease of production.
Examples of the alkenyloxy group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms independently represented by R 1 to R 11 include those in which the alkenyl group moiety is the aforementioned alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms. Among these, an alkenyloxy group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms is preferred, and an alkenyloxy group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferred from the viewpoint of low molecular weight, compatibility and solubility, and ease of production.
The alkanoyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms independently represented by R 1 to R 11 may be linear or branched. For example, methanoyl group, ethanoyl group, n-propanoyl group, isopropanoyl group, n -Butanoyl group, t-butanoyl group, n-hexanoyl group, n-octanoyl group, n-decanoyl group, n-dodecanoyl group and the like. Among these, an alkanoyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable, and an alkanoyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms is more preferable from the viewpoint of low molecular weight, compatibility and solubility, and ease of production.
The alkenoyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms independently represented by R 1 to R 11 may be linear or branched. For example, ethenoyl group, n-propenoyl group, isopropenoyl group, n-butenoyl group, t -Butenoyl group, n-hexenoyl group, n-octenoyl group, n-decenoyl group, n-dodecenoyl group and the like. Among these, an alkenoyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms is preferred, and an alkenoyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferred from the viewpoint of low molecular weight, compatibility and solubility, and ease of production.
 R1~R11がそれぞれ独立して示す環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基としては、例えばフェニル基、ナフチル基、アントリル基が挙げられる。
 R1~R11がそれぞれ独立して示す環形成原子数3~14のヘテロ環基としては、例えば2-フラニル基、2-チオフェニル基、2-ピリジニル基、下記式(A)で表される基(以下、置換基(A)と称する。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
等の環形成原子数5~14の不飽和ヘテロ環基;2-テトラヒドロフリル基、3-テトラヒドロフリル基、ピロリジニル基、ピペリジニル基、2,2,6,6-トリメチルピペリジン-4-イル基等の環形成原子数3~10の飽和ヘテロ環基が挙げられる。これらの中でも、低分子量とする観点、相溶性や溶解性の観点及び製造容易性の観点から、環形成原子数5~6の不飽和ヘテロ環基、環形成原子数3~6の飽和ヘテロ環基が好ましい。
Examples of the aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms independently represented by R 1 to R 11 include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, and an anthryl group.
Examples of the heterocyclic group having 3 to 14 ring atoms independently represented by R 1 to R 11 include a 2-furanyl group, a 2-thiophenyl group, a 2-pyridinyl group, and the following formula (A): Group (hereinafter referred to as substituent (A))
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
An unsaturated heterocyclic group having 5 to 14 ring atoms such as 2-tetrahydrofuryl group, 3-tetrahydrofuryl group, pyrrolidinyl group, piperidinyl group, 2,2,6,6-trimethylpiperidin-4-yl group, etc. And a saturated heterocyclic group having 3 to 10 ring atoms. Among these, from the viewpoints of low molecular weight, compatibility and solubility, and ease of production, unsaturated heterocyclic groups having 5 to 6 ring atoms and saturated heterocyclic rings having 3 to 6 ring atoms are preferable. Groups are preferred.
 また、前記した「R3とR4又はR5が一緒になって環を形成する」というのは、n=2、Wが単結合及びZが酸素原子である場合を例に挙げると下記式で説明され、右側に例示した環が具体例として挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
The above-mentioned “R 3 and R 4 or R 5 together form a ring” means that n = 2, W is a single bond and Z is an oxygen atom. The ring illustrated in the right side and exemplified on the right side is given as a specific example.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
 R4とR5が一緒になって形成する環としては、例えば、シクロペンチル環、シクロオクチル環等の環形成炭素数3~10(好ましくは3~6)の環が挙げられる。 Examples of the ring formed by combining R 4 and R 5 include rings having 3 to 10 (preferably 3 to 6) ring-forming carbon atoms such as a cyclopentyl ring and a cyclooctyl ring.
 なお、R1~R11がそれぞれ独立して示す、前記アルキル基、アルケニル基、シクロアルキル基、シクロアルケニル基、アルコキシ基、アルケニルオキシ基、アルカノイル基、アルケノイル基、アリール基及びヘテロ環基は、置換基を有していてもよい。
 R1~R11がそれぞれ独立して示すアルキル基、アルケニル基の置換基としては、ヒドロキシル基;カルボキシル基;メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基等の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状の炭素数1~18(好ましくは1~10、より好ましくは1~5)のアルコキシ基;直鎖状又は分岐鎖状の炭素数2~18(好ましくは2~10、より好ましくは2~6)のアルケニルオキシ基;直鎖状又は分岐鎖状の炭素数2~18(好ましくは2~10、より好ましくは2~6)のアルケニルチオ基;直鎖状又は分岐鎖状の炭素数1~18(好ましくは1~10、より好ましくは1~5)のアルキルチオ基;炭素数5~18(好ましくは5~10)のシクロアルケニル基;シクロプロピル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基等の炭素数3~18(好ましくは3~10、より好ましくは3~6)のシクロアルキル基;フェノキシ基等の環形成炭素数6~10のアリールオキシ基;フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子等のハロゲン原子;酸素原子(=O);硫黄原子(=S);シアノ基;ニトロ基;トリメチルシリル基等のトリアルキルシリル基;トリメトキシシリル基等のトリアルコキシシリル基;フェニル基、ナフチル基、アントリル基等の環形成炭素数6~14(好ましくは6~10)のアリール基;-COR12;-OCOR13;-NR1415;-NHCOR16;-NHCOOR17;-CONR1819;-COOR20;-SO3NR2122;-SO323;エポキシ基やテトラヒドロフラニル基等の環形成原子数3~6の環状エーテル基、2-チエニル基、2-ピリジル基、フリル基、チアゾリル基、ベンゾチアゾリル基、モルホリノ基、前記置換基(A)等の飽和もしくは不飽和の環形成原子数3~10(好ましくは3~6)のヘテロ環基等が挙げられる。
 上記一般式中、R12~R23は、それぞれ独立に、炭素数1~20の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基、環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基を示す。該アルキル基、アリール基としては、R1~R11の場合と同じものが挙げられる。
The alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, cycloalkenyl group, alkoxy group, alkenyloxy group, alkanoyl group, alkenoyl group, aryl group and heterocyclic group, each independently represented by R 1 to R 11 , It may have a substituent.
Examples of the substituent for the alkyl group and alkenyl group independently represented by R 1 to R 11 include a hydroxyl group; a carboxyl group; a straight-chain or branched-chain carbon atom such as a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, and a propoxy group. 18 (preferably 1-10, more preferably 1-5) alkoxy group; linear or branched alkenyloxy group having 2-18 (preferably 2-10, more preferably 2-6) carbon atoms Linear or branched alkenylthio group having 2 to 18 carbon atoms (preferably 2 to 10 and more preferably 2 to 6); linear or branched carbon atom number 1 to 18 (preferably 1) -10, more preferably 1-5) alkylthio group; C5-C18 cycloalkenyl group (preferably 5-10); C3-C18 (preferably cyclopropyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, etc.) Or a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10, more preferably 3 to 6) an aryloxy group having 6 to 10 ring carbon atoms such as a phenoxy group; a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom or an iodine atom; Oxygen atom (= O); sulfur atom (= S); cyano group; nitro group; trialkylsilyl group such as trimethylsilyl group; trialkoxysilyl group such as trimethoxysilyl group; phenyl group, naphthyl group, anthryl group, etc. -COR 12 ; -OCOR 13 ; -NR 14 R 15 ; -NHCOR 16 ; -NHCOOR 17 ; -CONR 18 R 19 ; -COOR 20 ; -SO 3 NR 21 R 22; -SO 3 R 23; epoxy group and tetrahydronaphthyl ring atoms 3-6 cyclic ether groups such as furanyl group, 2-thienyl, 2-pyridyl Group, a furyl group, a thiazolyl group, a benzothiazolyl group, a morpholino group, a saturated or unsaturated heterocyclic group having 3 to 10 (preferably 3 to 6) ring atoms such as the substituent (A), and the like. .
In the above general formula, R 12 to R 23 each independently represents a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms. Examples of the alkyl group and aryl group are the same as those for R 1 to R 11 .
 R1~R11がそれぞれ独立して示すアルコキシ基、アルケニルオキシ基、アルカノイル基、アルケノイル基の置換基としては、ヒドロキシル基;カルボキシル基;メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基等の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状の炭素数1~18(好ましくは1~10、より好ましくは1~5)のアルコキシ基;直鎖状又は分岐鎖状の炭素数2~18(好ましくは2~10、より好ましくは2~6)のアルケニルオキシ基;直鎖状又は分岐鎖状の炭素数2~18(好ましくは2~10、より好ましくは2~6)のアルケニルチオ基;直鎖状又は分岐鎖状の炭素数1~18(好ましくは1~10、より好ましくは1~5)のアルキルチオ基;炭素数5~18(好ましくは5~10)のシクロアルケニル基;シクロプロピル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基等の炭素数3~18(好ましくは3~10、より好ましくは3~6)のシクロアルキル基;フェノキシ基等の環形成炭素数6~10のアリールオキシ基;フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子等のハロゲン原子;酸素原子(=O);硫黄原子(=S);シアノ基;ニトロ基;トリメチルシリル基等のトリアルキルシリル基;トリメトキシシリル基等のトリアルコキシシリル基;フェニル基、ナフチル基、アントリル基等の環形成炭素数6~14(好ましくは6~10)のアリール基;-COR12;-OCOR13;-NR1415;-NHCOR16;-NHCOOR17;-CONR1819;-COOR20;-SO3NR2122;-SO323;エポキシ基やテトラヒドロフラニル基等の環形成原子数3~6の環状エーテル基、2-チエニル基、2-ピリジル基、フリル基、チアゾリル基、ベンゾチアゾリル基、モルホリノ基、前記置換基(A)等の飽和もしくは不飽和の環形成原子数3~10(好ましくは3~6)のヘテロ環基等が挙げられる(式中、R12~R23は、前記定義の通りである。)。 Examples of the substituent of the alkoxy group, alkenyloxy group, alkanoyl group, and alkenoyl group independently represented by R 1 to R 11 include a hydroxyl group; a carboxyl group; a linear or branched group such as a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, and a propoxy group A linear alkoxy group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms (preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5); a linear or branched carbon group having 2 to 18 carbon atoms (preferably 2 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 carbon atoms) To 6) alkenyloxy group; linear or branched alkenylthio group having 2 to 18 carbon atoms (preferably 2 to 10, more preferably 2 to 6); linear or branched carbon number An alkylthio group having 1 to 18 (preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5); a cycloalkenyl group having 5 to 18 carbon atoms (preferably 5 to 10); a cyclopropyl group, a cyclopentyl group A cycloalkyl group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms (preferably 3 to 10, more preferably 3 to 6) such as a cyclohexyl group; an aryloxy group having 6 to 10 ring carbon atoms such as a phenoxy group; a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, Halogen atoms such as bromine atom and iodine atom; oxygen atom (= O); sulfur atom (= S); cyano group; nitro group; trialkylsilyl group such as trimethylsilyl group; trialkoxysilyl group such as trimethoxysilyl group; An aryl group having 6 to 14 (preferably 6 to 10) ring carbon atoms such as a phenyl group, a naphthyl group and an anthryl group; —COR 12 ; —OCOR 13 ; —NR 14 R 15 ; —NHCOR 16 ; —NHCOOR 17 ; -CONR 18 R 19; -COOR 20; ring-forming atoms of 3 to 6 such as an epoxy group or a tetrahydrofuranyl group; -SO 3 NR 21 R 22; -SO 3 R 23 Number of saturated or unsaturated ring-forming atoms such as an ether group, 2-thienyl group, 2-pyridyl group, furyl group, thiazolyl group, benzothiazolyl group, morpholino group, and the substituent (A) (preferably 3 To 6) and the like (wherein R 12 to R 23 are as defined above).
 R1~R11がそれぞれ独立して示すシクロアルキル基、シクロアルケニル基の置換基としては、ヒドロキシル基;カルボキシル基;メチル基、エチル基等の直鎖又は分岐状の炭素数1~18(好ましくは1~10、より好ましくは1~5)のアルキル基;メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基等の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状の炭素数1~18(好ましくは1~10、より好ましくは1~5)のアルコキシ基;直鎖状又は分岐鎖状の炭素数2~18(好ましくは2~10、より好ましくは2~6)のアルケニルオキシ基;直鎖状又は分岐鎖状の炭素数2~18(好ましくは2~10、より好ましくは2~6)のアルケニルチオ基;ビニル基、アリル基等の炭素数2~18(好ましくは2~10、より好ましくは2~6)の直鎖又は分岐状のアルケニル基;直鎖状又は分岐鎖状の炭素数1~18(好ましくは1~10、より好ましくは1~5)のアルキルチオ基;炭素数5~18(好ましくは5~10)のシクロアルケニル基;フェノキシ基等の環形成炭素数6~10のアリールオキシ基;フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子等のハロゲン原子;酸素原子(=O);硫黄原子(=S);シアノ基;ニトロ基;トリメチルシリル基等のトリアルキルシリル基;トリメトキシシリル基等のトリアルコキシシリル基;フェニル基、ナフチル基、アントリル基等の環形成炭素数6~14(好ましくは6~10)のアリール基;-COR12;-OCOR13;-NR1415;-NHCOR16;-NHCOOR17;-CONR1819;-COOR20;-SO3NR2122;-SO323;エポキシ基やテトラヒドロフラニル基等の環形成原子数3~6の環状エーテル基、2-チエニル基、2-ピリジル基、フリル基、チアゾリル基、ベンゾチアゾリル基、モルホリノ基、前記置換基(A)等の飽和もしくは不飽和の環形成原子数3~10(好ましくは3~6)のヘテロ環基等が挙げられる(式中、R12~R23は、前記定義の通りである。)。 Examples of the substituent for the cycloalkyl group or cycloalkenyl group independently represented by R 1 to R 11 include a hydroxyl group; a carboxyl group; a linear or branched carbon number of 1 to 18 such as a methyl group or an ethyl group (preferably Is an alkyl group of 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5; linear or branched carbon number of 1 to 18 (preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1) such as methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, etc. To 5) alkoxy group; linear or branched alkenyloxy group having 2 to 18 carbon atoms (preferably 2 to 10 and more preferably 2 to 6); linear or branched carbon number 2 -18 (preferably 2 to 10, more preferably 2 to 6) alkenylthio group; straight chain having 2 to 18 carbon atoms (preferably 2 to 10, more preferably 2 to 6) such as vinyl group and allyl group Or branched alkeni A linear or branched alkylthio group having 1 to 18 (preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5) carbon atoms; a cycloalkenyl group having 5 to 18 (preferably 5 to 10) carbon atoms; Aryloxy group having 6 to 10 ring carbon atoms such as phenoxy group; halogen atom such as fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom and iodine atom; oxygen atom (= O); sulfur atom (= S); cyano group; A trialkylsilyl group such as a trimethylsilyl group; a trialkoxysilyl group such as a trimethoxysilyl group; an aryl group having 6 to 14 (preferably 6 to 10) ring-forming carbon atoms such as a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, and an anthryl group; -COR 12; -OCOR 13; -NR 14 R 15; -NHCOR 16; -NHCOOR 17; -CONR 18 R 19; -COOR 20; -SO 3 NR 21 R 22; -SO 3 R 23 A cyclic ether group having 3 to 6 ring atoms such as an epoxy group and a tetrahydrofuranyl group, a 2-thienyl group, a 2-pyridyl group, a furyl group, a thiazolyl group, a benzothiazolyl group, a morpholino group, the substituent (A), etc. Examples thereof include a saturated or unsaturated heterocyclic group having 3 to 10 (preferably 3 to 6) ring-forming atoms (wherein R 12 to R 23 are as defined above).
 R1~R11がそれぞれ独立して示すアリール基、ヘテロ環基の置換基としては、ヒドロキシル基;カルボキシル基;メチル基、エチル基等の直鎖又は分岐状の炭素数1~18(好ましくは1~10、より好ましくは1~5)のアルキル基;メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基等の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状の炭素数1~18(好ましくは1~10、より好ましくは1~5)のアルコキシ基;直鎖状又は分岐鎖状の炭素数2~18(好ましくは2~10、より好ましくは2~6)のアルケニルオキシ基;直鎖状又は分岐鎖状の炭素数2~18(好ましくは2~10、より好ましくは2~6)のアルケニルチオ基;直鎖状又は分岐鎖状の炭素数1~18(好ましくは1~10、より好ましくは1~5)のアルキルチオ基;ビニル基、アリル基等の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状の炭素数2~18(好ましくは2~10、より好ましくは2~6)のアルケニル基;炭素数5~18(好ましくは5~10)のシクロアルケニル基;シクロプロピル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基等の炭素数3~18(好ましくは3~10、より好ましくは3~6)のシクロアルキル基;フェノキシ基等の環形成炭素数6~10のアリールオキシ基;フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子等のハロゲン原子;シアノ基;ニトロ基;トリメチルシリル基等のトリアルキルシリル基;トリメトキシシリル基等のトリアルコキシシリル基;-COR12;-OCOR13;-NR1415;-NHCOR16;-NHCOOR17;-CONR1819;-COOR20;-SO3NR2122;-SO323;エポキシ基やテトラヒドロフラニル基等の環形成原子数3~6の環状エーテル基、2-チエニル基、2-ピリジル基、フリル基、チアゾリル基、ベンゾチアゾリル基、モルホリノ基、前記置換基(A)等の飽和もしくは不飽和の環形成原子数3~10(好ましくは3~6)のヘテロ環基等が挙げられる(式中、R12~R23は、前記定義の通りである。)。 The substituents of the aryl group and heterocyclic group which R 1 to R 11 each independently represent include a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, a straight chain or branched chain having 1 to 18 carbon atoms (preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, etc.) (preferably An alkyl group having 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5; a linear or branched carbon number of 1 to 18 (preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 1) such as a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, or a propoxy group 5) an alkoxy group; a linear or branched alkenyloxy group having 2 to 18 carbon atoms (preferably 2 to 10, more preferably 2 to 6); a linear or branched carbon number 2 to 18 (preferably 2 to 10, more preferably 2 to 6) alkenylthio group; linear or branched alkylthio group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms (preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5) ; Straight of vinyl group, allyl group, etc. Or a branched alkenyl group having 2 to 18 (preferably 2 to 10, more preferably 2 to 6) carbon atoms; a cycloalkenyl group having 5 to 18 (preferably 5 to 10) carbon atoms; a cyclopropyl group, A cycloalkyl group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms (preferably 3 to 10, more preferably 3 to 6) such as a cyclopentyl group and a cyclohexyl group; an aryloxy group having 6 to 10 ring carbon atoms such as a phenoxy group; a fluorine atom; trialkoxysilyl group such as trimethoxysilyl group; a trialkylsilyl group such as trimethylsilyl group; a cyano group; a nitro group chlorine atom, a bromine atom, a halogen atom such as iodine atom -COR 12; -OCOR 13; -NR 14 R 15; -NHCOR 16; -NHCOOR 17 ; -CONR 18 R 19; -COOR 20; -SO 3 NR 21 R 22; -SO 3 R 23; epoxy A saturated ether such as a cyclic ether group having 3 to 6 ring-forming atoms such as a group or a tetrahydrofuranyl group, a 2-thienyl group, a 2-pyridyl group, a furyl group, a thiazolyl group, a benzothiazolyl group, a morpholino group, or the substituent (A). Alternatively, an unsaturated heterocyclic group having 3 to 10 (preferably 3 to 6) ring-forming atoms can be used (wherein R 12 to R 23 are as defined above).
 また、Arが示す環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基としては、例えばフェニル基、ナフチル基、アントリル基、クリセニル基、フェナントレニル基、アズレニル基、アセナフチレニル基等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、低分子量とする観点、相溶性や溶解性の観点及び製造容易性の観点から、環形成炭素数6~10のアリール基が好ましく、フェニル基がさらに好ましい。Arが示す環形成原子数5~14のヘテロアリール基としては、例えば2-フラニル基、2-チオフェニル基、2-ピリジニル基等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、低分子量とする観点、相溶性や溶解性の観点及び製造容易性の観点から、環形成原子数5~6のへテロアリール基が好ましく、2-フラニル基、2-チオフェニル基がより好ましい。
 これらのアリール基及びヘテロアリール基は置換基を有していてもよい。該置換基としては、前記したR1~R11がそれぞれ独立して示すアリール基の置換基と同じものが挙げられ、それらの中でも、炭素数1~18(好ましくは1~10、より好ましくは1~5)のアルキル基が好ましく、メチル基がより好ましい。
 なお、該置換基がアルキル基又はアルケニル基である場合、Arと共に縮合環を形成していてもよく、例えばフルオレン環、インデン環等を形成していてもよい。
Examples of the aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms represented by Ar include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, an anthryl group, a chrycenyl group, a phenanthrenyl group, an azulenyl group, and an acenaphthylenyl group. Among these, an aryl group having 6 to 10 ring carbon atoms is preferred, and a phenyl group is more preferred from the viewpoint of low molecular weight, compatibility and solubility, and ease of production. Examples of the heteroaryl group having 5 to 14 ring atoms represented by Ar include a 2-furanyl group, a 2-thiophenyl group, and a 2-pyridinyl group. Among these, from the viewpoint of low molecular weight, compatibility and solubility, and ease of production, a heteroaryl group having 5 to 6 ring atoms is preferable, and a 2-furanyl group and a 2-thiophenyl group are more preferable. preferable.
These aryl groups and heteroaryl groups may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the same substituents as the aryl group independently represented by R 1 to R 11 described above, and among them, the number of carbon atoms is 1 to 18 (preferably 1 to 10, more preferably The alkyl group of 1 to 5) is preferable, and a methyl group is more preferable.
In addition, when this substituent is an alkyl group or an alkenyl group, it may form a condensed ring with Ar, for example, a fluorene ring, an indene ring, or the like.
 Zが表す>NR3’中のR3’は、前述の通り、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基を示すか、又はR3’はR3とつながって、窒素原子と共に環を形成している。
 該炭素数1~20のアルキル基としては、R1~R11の場合と同じものが挙げられ、好ましいものも同じものが挙げられ、メチル基が特に好ましい。
 また、R3’はR3とつながって、窒素原子と共に形成する環の具体例としては、モルホリン環、ピロリジン環、ピペリジン環、ピペコリン環、ピペラジン環などが挙げられる。これらの中でも、モルホリン環が好ましい。
 WとZの組み合わせとしては、Wが単結合の場合、Zは酸素原子又は>Nr3’が好ましく、Wが酸素原子の場合、Zは単結合又は酸素原子が好ましい。
Z represents>'R 3 in' NR 3, as described above, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or R 3 'is connected to the R 3, ring together with the nitrogen atom Is forming.
Examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms include the same as those in the case of R 1 to R 11 , and preferable examples thereof are the same, and a methyl group is particularly preferable.
Specific examples of the ring formed by R 3 ′ connecting to R 3 together with the nitrogen atom include a morpholine ring, a pyrrolidine ring, a piperidine ring, a pipecoline ring, and a piperazine ring. Among these, a morpholine ring is preferable.
As a combination of W and Z, when W is a single bond, Z is preferably an oxygen atom or> Nr 3 ′, and when W is an oxygen atom, Z is preferably a single bond or an oxygen atom.
 さらに、一般式(I-a)において、(a)R1、R2及びR3が、それぞれ独立に、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、nが2であり、複数のR4及びR5が、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、Arが、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基である光重合開始剤、(b)R1、R2及びR3が、それぞれ独立に、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、nが2であり、複数のR4及びR5が、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、Arが、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数5~14のヘテロアリール基である光重合開始剤、(c)R1及びR2が、それぞれ独立に、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、R3が置換もしくは無置換の炭素数3~18のシクロアルキル基であり、nが2であり、複数のR4及びR5が、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基である光重合開始剤、(d)R1及びR2が、それぞれ独立に、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、R3が環形成原子数3~6の環状エーテル基で置換された炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、nが2であり、複数のR4及びR5が、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基である光重合開始剤も好ましい。さらに、後述する光硬化性組成物における光重合開始剤の含有量の低減の観点から、上記(a)及び(b)の場合は、分子量が515以下であることが好ましく、500以下であることがより好ましく、上記(c)及び(d)の場合は、分子量が550以下であることが好ましい。
 さらに、本発明の効果の観点、及び光重合開始剤の分解物による重合物の汚染や装置の汚染を低減する観点から、上記の好ましい光重合開始剤において、R4~R11がそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は炭素数1~20のアルキル基であることがより好ましい。なお、各基の好ましいものは、前記した通りである。
 以下に、本発明の光重合開始剤(I-a)の具体例を示すが、特にこれらに制限されるものではない。
Further, in the general formula (Ia), (a) R 1 , R 2 and R 3 are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, n is 2, A plurality of R 4 and R 5 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and Ar is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms. (B) R 1 , R 2 and R 3 are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, n is 2, and a plurality of R 4 And R 5 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and Ar is a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl group having 5 to 14 ring carbon atoms. polymerization initiator, is (c) R 1 and R 2, each independently, location Or an alkyl group unsubstituted carbon atoms 1 ~ 20, R 3 is a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having a carbon 3 ~ 18, n is 2, a plurality of R 4 and R 5, Each independently a photopolymerization initiator which is a hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, (d) R 1 and R 2 are each independently substituted or unsubstituted carbon atoms having 1 to 20 alkyl groups, R 3 is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms substituted with a cyclic ether group having 3 to 6 ring atoms, n is 2, and a plurality of R 4 and R 5 are Independently, a photopolymerization initiator which is a hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is also preferable. Furthermore, from the viewpoint of reducing the content of the photopolymerization initiator in the photocurable composition to be described later, in the case of (a) and (b), the molecular weight is preferably 515 or less, and 500 or less. More preferably, in the case of the above (c) and (d), the molecular weight is preferably 550 or less.
Further, from the viewpoint of the effect of the present invention and from the viewpoint of reducing contamination of the polymer due to the decomposition product of the photopolymerization initiator and contamination of the apparatus, in the above preferable photopolymerization initiator, R 4 to R 11 are each independently More preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. In addition, the preferable thing of each group is as having mentioned above.
Specific examples of the photopolymerization initiator (Ia) of the present invention are shown below, but are not particularly limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
 さらに、一般式(I-b)において、(e)R1及びR3が、それぞれ独立に、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、Wが酸素原子であり、Zが単結合又は酸素原子であり、Arが、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基である光重合開始剤、(f)R1及びR3が、それぞれ独立に、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、R2が、-OCOR13(R13は、前記定義の通りである。)又は-COOR20(R20は、炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基を示す。)で表されるエステル基を有する炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、Wが酸素原子であり、Zが単結合又は酸素原子であり、Arが、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基である光重合開始剤、(g)R1及びR3が、それぞれ独立に、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、Wが単結合であり、Zが>NR3’(R3’は、前記定義のとおりである。)であり、Arが、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基である光重合開始剤、(h)R1及びR3が、それぞれ独立に、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、R2が、-OCOR13(R13は、前記定義の通りである。)又は-COOR20(R20は、炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基を示す。)で表されるエステル基を有する炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、Wが単結合であり、Zが>NR3’(R3’は、前記定義のとおりである。)であり、Arが、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基である光重合開始剤、(i)R1が、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、R3が水素原子であり、Wが単結合であり、Zが酸素原子であり、Arが、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基である光重合開始剤も好ましい。
 なお、上記(g)の光重合開始剤においては、>NR3’中のR3’はR3とつながって、窒素原子と共に環を形成しているのも好ましく、モルホリン環を形成しているのがより好ましい。
 さらに、本発明の効果の観点、及び光重合開始剤の分解物による重合物の汚染や装置の汚染を低減する観点から、上記の好ましい光重合開始剤において、R4~R11がそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は炭素数1~20のアルキル基であることがより好ましい。なお、各基の好ましいものは、前記した通りである。
 以下に、本発明の光重合開始剤(I-b)の具体例を示すが、特にこれらに制限されるものではない。
Further, in the general formula (Ib), (e) R 1 and R 3 are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, W is an oxygen atom, and Z is A single bond or an oxygen atom, and Ar is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms; (f) R 1 and R 3 are each independently substituted or unsubstituted. A substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and R 2 is —OCOR 13 (R 13 is as defined above) or —COOR 20 (R 20 is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms). Or an aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms.) And an ester group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, W is an oxygen atom, and Z is a single bond or an oxygen atom. , Ar is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms Photoinitiator is a group, (g) R 1 and R 3 are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having a carbon number of 1 ~ 20, W is a single bond, Z is> NR 3 (R 3 'is as defined above), and Ar is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms, (h) R 1 and R 3 is each independently a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and R 2 is —OCOR 13 (R 13 is as defined above) or —COOR 20 (R 20 Represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms.), And W is a single bond. , Z is> NR 3 '(R 3', the are as defined.) and, Ar is a substituted if Photoinitiator is unsubstituted ring aryl group having 6 ~ 14, (i) R 1 is a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having a carbon number of 1 ~ 20, R 3 is a hydrogen atom Also preferred are photopolymerization initiators in which W is a single bond, Z is an oxygen atom, and Ar is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms.
In the above photopolymerization initiator (g), R 3 ′ in> NR 3 ′ is preferably connected to R 3 to form a ring with a nitrogen atom, and forms a morpholine ring. Is more preferable.
Further, from the viewpoint of the effect of the present invention and from the viewpoint of reducing contamination of the polymer due to the decomposition product of the photopolymerization initiator and contamination of the apparatus, in the above preferable photopolymerization initiator, R 4 to R 11 are each independently More preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. In addition, the preferable thing of each group is as having mentioned above.
Specific examples of the photopolymerization initiator (Ib) of the present invention are shown below, but are not particularly limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
 なお、本発明の光重合開始剤としては、前述の通り一般式(I-a)においてn=2であることが好ましく、具体的には下記一般式(I-a1)で表される光重合開始剤が好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
 上記式(I-a1)中、R1~R3、R6~R11及びArは、前記定義の通りである。R4’及びR5’は、それぞれR4及びR5の定義と同じであり、好ましいものも同じである。
The photopolymerization initiator of the present invention is preferably n = 2 in the general formula (Ia) as described above, and specifically, photopolymerization represented by the following general formula (Ia1) Initiators are preferred.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
In the above formula (I-a1), R 1 to R 3 , R 6 to R 11 and Ar are as defined above. R 4 ′ and R 5 ′ have the same definitions as R 4 and R 5 , respectively, and preferred ones are also the same.
[光重合開始剤の製造方法]
 本発明の光重合開始剤(I)の製造方法に特に制限は無いが、例えば、以下の光重合開始剤(I-a)の製造方法や光重合開始剤(I-b)の製造方法によって容易に製造することができる。
(1.光重合開始剤(I-a)の製造方法)
 本発明の光重合開始剤(I-a)の製造方法に特に制限は無いが、例えば、下記工程1~工程4によって、容易に製造することができる。
[Method for producing photopolymerization initiator]
The method for producing the photopolymerization initiator (I) of the present invention is not particularly limited. It can be manufactured easily.
(1. Method for producing photopolymerization initiator (Ia))
The method for producing the photopolymerization initiator (Ia) of the present invention is not particularly limited, but can be easily produced by, for example, the following steps 1 to 4.
(工程1)
 工程1としては、例えば、前記カルバゾール誘導体(1)とZ(CR45nCOOR3(Zは、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子等のハロゲン原子を示す。また、R3、R4及びR5は、前記定義の通りである。)で表されるハロゲン化物とを、塩基の存在下に反応させる工程が挙げられる。該工程により、下記一般式(3a)で表されるカルボニルアルキル基導入体が得られる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
(式中、R3~R11は、前記定義の通りであり、好ましいものも同じである。)
 前記塩基としては、n-ブチルリチウム、t-ブチルリチウム、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム等が挙げられる。反応温度は、通常、好ましくは0~200℃であり、反応時間は通常、好ましくは2~100時間である。
(Process 1)
Step 1 includes, for example, the carbazole derivative (1) and Z (CR 4 R 5 ) n COOR 3 (Z represents a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, or an iodine atom. R 3 , R 4 and R 5 are as defined above), and a step of reacting with a halide represented by By this step, a carbonylalkyl group-introduced product represented by the following general formula (3a) is obtained.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
(Wherein R 3 to R 11 are as defined above, and preferred ones are also the same).
Examples of the base include n-butyl lithium, t-butyl lithium, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide and the like. The reaction temperature is usually preferably 0 to 200 ° C., and the reaction time is usually preferably 2 to 100 hours.
 なお、一般式(I-a)においてn=2の光重合開始剤を製造する場合、工程1は、以下の工程であると製造が容易であり、好ましい。
 下記一般式(1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
(式中、R6~R11は、前記定義の通りであり、好ましいものも同じである。)
で表されるカルバゾール誘導体[以下、カルバゾール誘導体(1)と称する。]と、下記一般式(2a)
In the case of producing a photopolymerization initiator with n = 2 in the general formula (Ia), it is preferable that Step 1 is the following step because production is easy.
The following general formula (1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
(Wherein R 6 to R 11 are as defined above, and preferred ones are also the same.)
[Hereinafter referred to as a carbazole derivative (1). And the following general formula (2a)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
(式中、R3、R4’及びR5’は、前記定義の通りであり、好ましいものも同じである。)
で表されるアクリレート誘導体[以下、アクリレート誘導体(2a)と称する。]とを塩基の存在下に反応させることにより、下記一般式(3a’)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
(In the formula, R 3 , R 4 ′ and R 5 ′ are as defined above, and preferred ones are also the same.)
An acrylate derivative represented by the formula [hereinafter referred to as an acrylate derivative (2a). And in the presence of a base, the following general formula (3a ′)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
(式中、R3、R4’、R5’及びR6~R11は、前記定義の通りであり、好ましいものも同じである。)
で表されるカルボニルアルキル基導入体[以下、カルボニルアルキル基導入体(3a’)と称する。]を得る工程。
 以下、n=2の光重合開始剤を製造する場合に好ましいとするこの工程1について、詳細に説明する。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
(In the formula, R 3 , R 4 ′, R 5 ′ and R 6 to R 11 are as defined above, and preferred ones are also the same.)
Embedded image [hereinafter referred to as a carbonylalkyl group-introduced product (3a ′)]. The process of obtaining.
Hereinafter, this step 1 which is preferable when producing a photopolymerization initiator of n = 2 will be described in detail.
 工程1で使用するアクリレート誘導体(2a)の使用量に特に制限は無いが、カルバゾール誘導体(1)1モルに対して、好ましくは0.5~2モル、より好ましくは0.8~1.2モルであり、未反応物を低減する観点から、ほぼ等量で反応させることがさらに好ましい。
 工程1は、塩基の存在下に実施する。該塩基としては、Michael付加反応に使用し得る塩基であればよく、有機塩基、無機塩基のいずれも用いることができる。有機塩基としては、例えばピリジン、ジアザビシクロウンデセン(DBU)、ジアザビシクロノネン(DBN)等が挙げられる。無機塩基としては、例えば炭酸ナトリウム、炭酸カリウム等のアルカリ金属炭酸塩;炭酸マグネシウム、炭酸カルシウム等のアルカリ土類金属炭酸塩;炭酸水素ナトリウム、炭酸水素カリウム等のアルカリ金属炭酸水素塩;水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム等のアルカリ金属水酸化物;水酸化マグネシウム、水酸化カルシウム等のアルカリ土類金属水酸化物等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、アルカリ金属炭酸塩、アルカリ土類金属炭酸塩が好ましく、アルカリ金属炭酸塩がより好ましく、炭酸カリウムがさらに好ましい。
 該塩基の使用量に特に制限は無いが、反応効率及び製造コストの観点から、カルバゾール誘導体(1)1モルに対して、好ましくは0.5~2モル、より好ましくは0.8~1.2モルであり、ほぼ等量で使用することがさらに好ましい。
 工程1は、溶媒の存在下に実施することが好ましい。該溶媒としては、カルバゾール誘導体(1)、アクリレート誘導体(2a)及び塩基を溶解し得る溶媒を適宜選択すればよい。具体的には、ジメチルホルムアミド(DMF)、ジメチスルホキシド(DMSO)、塩化メチレン等が挙げられる。
The amount of the acrylate derivative (2a) used in Step 1 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.5 to 2 mol, more preferably 0.8 to 1.2, relative to 1 mol of the carbazole derivative (1). From the viewpoint of reducing unreacted substances, it is more preferable to carry out the reaction in substantially equal amounts.
Step 1 is performed in the presence of a base. The base may be any base that can be used for the Michael addition reaction, and any of organic bases and inorganic bases can be used. Examples of the organic base include pyridine, diazabicycloundecene (DBU), diazabicyclononene (DBN), and the like. Examples of the inorganic base include alkali metal carbonates such as sodium carbonate and potassium carbonate; alkaline earth metal carbonates such as magnesium carbonate and calcium carbonate; alkali metal hydrogen carbonates such as sodium hydrogen carbonate and potassium hydrogen carbonate; sodium hydroxide And alkali metal hydroxides such as potassium hydroxide; alkaline earth metal hydroxides such as magnesium hydroxide and calcium hydroxide. Among these, alkali metal carbonates and alkaline earth metal carbonates are preferable, alkali metal carbonates are more preferable, and potassium carbonate is more preferable.
The amount of the base to be used is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of reaction efficiency and production cost, it is preferably 0.5 to 2 mol, more preferably 0.8 to 1. mol per mol of the carbazole derivative (1). More preferably, it is 2 moles and is used in an approximately equal amount.
Step 1 is preferably performed in the presence of a solvent. What is necessary is just to select suitably the solvent which can melt | dissolve a carbazole derivative (1), an acrylate derivative (2a), and a base as this solvent. Specific examples include dimethylformamide (DMF), dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO), methylene chloride and the like.
 工程1の反応温度に特に制限は無いが、通常、好ましくは10~50℃、より好ましくは15~40℃、さらに好ましくは15~30℃で実施する。反応時間は、カルバゾール誘導体(1)、アクリレート誘導体(2a)及び塩基の種類や使用量並びに反応温度等によっても異なるが、通常、2時間~48時間程度である。
 工程1の実施形態に特に制限は無く、例えばカルバゾール誘導体(1)、アクリレート誘導体(2a)及び塩基を全て溶媒中に添加し、好ましくは前記温度で攪拌することにより、カルボニルアルキル基導入体(3a’)を得ることができる。
The reaction temperature in step 1 is not particularly limited, but is usually preferably 10 to 50 ° C, more preferably 15 to 40 ° C, and further preferably 15 to 30 ° C. The reaction time varies depending on the type and amount of the carbazole derivative (1), acrylate derivative (2a) and base, the reaction temperature, etc., but is usually about 2 to 48 hours.
The embodiment of Step 1 is not particularly limited, and for example, the carbazole derivative (1), the acrylate derivative (2a), and the base are all added to the solvent, and preferably stirred at the above temperature to thereby introduce the carbonylalkyl group-introduced compound (3a ') Can get.
 反応終了後、得られた反応混合液から、抽出等の通常の有機化合物の分離手段によって、カルボニルアルキル基導入体(3a)や(3a’)を得ることができる。適宜、蒸留、カラムクロマトグラフィー、再結晶等の、通常の有機化合物の精製手段によって精製することにより、カルボニルアルキル基導入体(3a)や(3a’)の純度を高めることもできる。 After completion of the reaction, the carbonylalkyl group-introduced product (3a) or (3a ′) can be obtained from the obtained reaction mixture by an ordinary organic compound separation means such as extraction. The purity of the carbonylalkyl group-introduced product (3a) or (3a ′) can also be increased by appropriately purifying by a usual organic compound purification means such as distillation, column chromatography, recrystallization and the like.
 以下、前記工程1で得られるカルボニルアルキル基導入体(3a)又は(3a’)を用いた工程2~4について説明するが、便宜上、n=2に相当するカルボニルアルキル基導入体(3a’)については省略して記載する。
(工程2)
 工程2は、工程1で得られたカルボニルアルキル基導入体(3a)と下記一般式(4)、(5)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
(式中、Xは、ハロゲン原子又は-OC(=O)Arを示し、X’は、ハロゲン原子又は-OC(=O)R2を示す。Ar及びR2は、前記定義の通りであり、好ましいものも同じである。)
で表される2つのアシル化剤[以下、それぞれアシル化剤(4)、アシル化剤(5)と称する。]とをルイス酸の存在下に反応させることにより、下記一般式(6a)
Hereinafter, Steps 2 to 4 using the carbonylalkyl group-introduced body (3a) or (3a ′) obtained in Step 1 will be described. For convenience, the carbonylalkyl group-introduced body (3a ′) corresponding to n = 2 Will be omitted.
(Process 2)
In step 2, the carbonylalkyl group-introduced product (3a) obtained in step 1 and the following general formulas (4) and (5)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
(Wherein X represents a halogen atom or —OC (═O) Ar, and X ′ represents a halogen atom or —OC (═O) R 2. Ar and R 2 are as defined above. The preferred ones are also the same.)
These are referred to as acylating agent (4) and acylating agent (5), respectively. In the presence of a Lewis acid, the following general formula (6a)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
(式中、R2~R11及びArは、前記定義の通りであり、好ましいものも同じである。)
で表されるジケトン体[以下、ジケトン体(6a)と称する。]を得る工程である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
(Wherein R 2 to R 11 and Ar are as defined above, and preferred ones are also the same).
[Hereinafter referred to as diketone body (6a). ] Is a step of obtaining.
 上記式中、X、X’がそれぞれ独立に示すハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子等が挙げられ、塩素原子が好ましい。
 工程2において、カルボニルアルキル基導入体(3a)と、アシル化剤(4)及び(5)との反応は、目的とするジケトン体(6a)の収率の観点から、カルボニルアルキル基導入体(3a)とアシル化剤(4)とを反応させた後、次いでアシル化剤(5)を反応させることが好ましい。
 アシル化剤(4)及び(5)の使用量は、カルボニルアルキル基導入体(3a)にそれぞれのアシル基を1つずつ導入する観点から、カルボニルアルキル基導入体(3a)1モルに対して、それぞれ好ましくは0.8~1.3モル、より好ましくは1~1.3モルであり、未反応物を低減する観点から、ほぼ等量で反応させることがさらに好ましい。特に、カルボニルアルキル基導入体(3a)とアシル化剤(4)とを反応させた後、次いでアシル化剤(5)を反応させる場合には、アシル化剤(5)の使用量は、前記範囲を超えても何ら問題ないが、あまり過剰であってもそれに見合う収率が得られるわけではなく、いたずらに生産コストがかさむことになり得る。
 工程2は、ルイス酸の存在下に実施する。ルイス酸としては、塩化アルミニウム、三フッ化ホウ素ジエチルエーテル錯体が好ましい。ルイス酸の使用量は、ジケトン体(6a)の収率の観点から、アシル化剤(4)又は(5)1モルに対して、通常、好ましくは0.8~2.5モル、より好ましくは1~2モルである。
In the above formula, examples of the halogen atom independently represented by X and X ′ include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom and an iodine atom, and a chlorine atom is preferred.
In Step 2, the reaction between the carbonylalkyl group-introduced product (3a) and the acylating agents (4) and (5) is carried out from the viewpoint of the yield of the desired diketone product (6a). It is preferable to react the acylating agent (5) after reacting 3a) with the acylating agent (4).
The amount of the acylating agents (4) and (5) used is from the viewpoint of introducing one acyl group into the carbonylalkyl group-introduced product (3a), and 1 mol of the carbonylalkyl group-introduced product (3a). Each of these is preferably 0.8 to 1.3 mol, more preferably 1 to 1.3 mol, and from the viewpoint of reducing unreacted substances, it is more preferable to carry out the reaction in substantially equal amounts. In particular, when the carbonylalkyl group-introduced product (3a) and the acylating agent (4) are reacted and then the acylating agent (5) is reacted, the amount of the acylating agent (5) used is as described above. If it exceeds the range, there is no problem, but if it is too much, the yield corresponding to it is not obtained, and the production cost can be unnecessarily high.
Step 2 is performed in the presence of a Lewis acid. As the Lewis acid, aluminum chloride and boron trifluoride diethyl ether complex are preferable. The amount of Lewis acid used is usually preferably from 0.8 to 2.5 mol, more preferably from 1 mol of the acylating agent (4) or (5) from the viewpoint of the yield of the diketone body (6a). Is 1 to 2 moles.
 工程2は、溶媒の存在下に実施することが好ましい。該溶媒としては、通常のFriedel-Craftsアシル化反応に使用し得る溶媒であれば特に制限は無い。具体的には、ジクロロメタン、ニトロベンゼン、アセトン、アセトニトリル等が挙げられる。
 工程2の反応温度は、反応開始時は-50~5℃(好ましくは-10~5℃)とし、反応が進行するにしたがって、徐々に室温(15~25℃程度)へ戻すことが好ましい。反応時間は、カルボニルアルキル基導入体(3a)、アシル化剤(4)及び(5)の種類及び使用量、並びに反応温度によっても異なるが、通常、好ましくは1~30時間である。なお、アシル化剤(4)及び(5)の両方がハロゲン化アシル又は酸無水物である場合、カルボニルアルキル基導入体(3a)とアシル化剤(4)とを反応させた後、生成物を単離することなく引き続きアシル化剤(5)と反応させることもできる。その場合、カルボニルアルキル基導入体(3a)とアシル化剤(4)との反応時間は、30分~5時間程度(好ましくは30分~3時間)とし、一方、カルボニルアルキル基導入体(3a)とアシル化剤(5)との反応時間を、30分~24時間程度(好ましくは30分~18時間)と長めに設けて十分に反応させることが好ましい。
Step 2 is preferably performed in the presence of a solvent. The solvent is not particularly limited as long as it is a solvent that can be used in a normal Friedel-Crafts acylation reaction. Specific examples include dichloromethane, nitrobenzene, acetone, acetonitrile and the like.
The reaction temperature in step 2 is preferably −50 to 5 ° C. (preferably −10 to 5 ° C.) at the start of the reaction, and gradually returned to room temperature (about 15 to 25 ° C.) as the reaction proceeds. The reaction time varies depending on the type and amount of the carbonylalkyl group-introduced product (3a), acylating agents (4) and (5), and the reaction temperature, but is usually preferably 1 to 30 hours. When both of the acylating agents (4) and (5) are acyl halides or acid anhydrides, the product is obtained after reacting the carbonylalkyl group-introduced product (3a) with the acylating agent (4). Can be subsequently reacted with the acylating agent (5) without isolation. In this case, the reaction time of the carbonylalkyl group-introduced product (3a) and the acylating agent (4) is about 30 minutes to 5 hours (preferably 30 minutes to 3 hours), while the carbonylalkyl group-introduced product (3a ) And the acylating agent (5) are preferably provided with a long reaction time of about 30 minutes to 24 hours (preferably 30 minutes to 18 hours) for sufficient reaction.
 収率の観点から、工程2の好ましい実施形態を以下に2通り説明する。
[1]氷浴で冷却しながらカルボニルアルキル基導入体(3a)及びアシル化剤(4)を適宜溶媒中で混合し、その混合溶液へルイス酸をゆっくり(好ましくは5分~1時間、より好ましくは10分~40分かけて)添加し、添加終了後、室温へ戻して一定時間(30分~5時間程度)攪拌を続ける。好ましくは、抽出及び洗浄等の通常の有機化合物の分離手段を行うことによって、一旦、生成物を分離取得する。
 こうして得られた生成物を適宜溶媒に溶解し、氷浴で冷却しながらアシル化剤(5)を添加し、そこへルイス酸をゆっくり(好ましくは5分~1時間、より好ましくは10分~40分かけて)添加し、添加終了後、室温へ戻して一定時間(30分~24時間程度)攪拌を続けることにより、ジケトン体(6a)を得ることができる。
[2]氷浴で冷却しながらカルボニルアルキル基導入体(3a)を適宜溶媒と混合してから、ルイス酸をゆっくり(好ましくは5分~1時間、より好ましくは10分~40分かけて)添加し、得られた混合溶液へアシル化剤(4)をゆっくり(好ましくは5分~1時間、より好ましくは10分~40分かけて)添加した後、室温へ戻して一定時間(30分~5時間程度)攪拌を続ける。再び氷浴で冷却しながらルイス酸をゆっくり(好ましくは5分~1時間、より好ましくは10分~40分かけて)添加し、得られた混合溶液へアシル化剤(5)をゆっくり(好ましくは5分~1時間、より好ましくは10分~40分かけて)添加した後、室温へ戻して一定時間以上(好ましくは30分~24時間程度)攪拌を続けることにより、ジケトン体(6a)を得ることができる。
 なお、反応終了後、得られた反応混合液から、抽出等の通常の有機化合物の分離手段によって、ジケトン体(6a)を得ることができる。適宜、蒸留、カラムクロマトグラフィー、再結晶等の、通常の有機化合物の精製手段によって精製することにより、ジケトン体(6a)の純度を高めることもできる。
From the viewpoint of yield, two preferred embodiments of Step 2 are described below.
[1] The carbonyl alkyl group-introduced product (3a) and the acylating agent (4) are appropriately mixed in a solvent while cooling in an ice bath, and the Lewis acid is slowly added to the mixed solution (preferably 5 minutes to 1 hour, more (Preferably over 10 minutes to 40 minutes) After the addition, the mixture is returned to room temperature and stirring is continued for a certain time (about 30 minutes to 5 hours). Preferably, the product is once separated and obtained by performing usual organic compound separation means such as extraction and washing.
The product thus obtained is appropriately dissolved in a solvent, acylating agent (5) is added while cooling in an ice bath, and Lewis acid is slowly added thereto (preferably 5 minutes to 1 hour, more preferably 10 minutes to (Over 40 minutes), and after completion of the addition, the mixture is returned to room temperature and stirred for a certain time (about 30 minutes to 24 hours) to obtain the diketone body (6a).
[2] The carbonyl alkyl group-introduced product (3a) is appropriately mixed with a solvent while cooling in an ice bath, and then the Lewis acid is slowly added (preferably 5 minutes to 1 hour, more preferably 10 minutes to 40 minutes). The acylating agent (4) is added slowly (preferably over 5 minutes to 1 hour, more preferably over 10 minutes to 40 minutes) to the resulting mixed solution, and then returned to room temperature for a certain time (30 minutes). Continue stirring for about 5 hours. The Lewis acid is added slowly (preferably over 5 minutes to 1 hour, more preferably over 10 minutes to 40 minutes) while cooling again in an ice bath, and the acylating agent (5) is added slowly (preferably over 10 minutes to 40 minutes). Is added for 5 minutes to 1 hour, more preferably over 10 minutes to 40 minutes, and after returning to room temperature, stirring is continued for a certain period of time (preferably about 30 minutes to 24 hours), whereby the diketone body (6a) Can be obtained.
In addition, after completion | finish of reaction, diketone body (6a) can be obtained from the obtained reaction liquid mixture by the isolation | separation means of normal organic compounds, such as extraction. The purity of the diketone body (6a) can also be increased by appropriately purifying by a usual means for purifying organic compounds such as distillation, column chromatography, recrystallization and the like.
(工程3)
 工程3は、工程2で得られたジケトン体(6a)とヒドロキシルアミンを反応させることにより、下記一般式(7a)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
(式中、R2~R11及びArは、前記定義の通りであり、好ましいものも同じである。)
で表されるオキシム体[以下、オキシム体(7a)と称する。]を得る工程である。
(Process 3)
Step 3 is a reaction of the diketone body (6a) obtained in Step 2 with hydroxylamine to give the following general formula (7a).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
(Wherein R 2 to R 11 and Ar are as defined above, and preferred ones are also the same).
[Hereinafter referred to as the oxime body (7a). ] Is a step of obtaining.
 工程3においては、ヒドロキシルアミン供給源としては、特に制限されるものではないが、塩化ヒドロキシルアミンが好ましい。該塩化ヒドロキシルアミンは、例えば水中で酢酸ナトリウム、等と反応させることにより、ヒドロキシルアミンの水溶液を得ることができる。
 ヒドロキシルアミン(塩化ヒドロキシルアミン)の使用量は、ジケトン体(6a)1モルに対して、好ましくは0.8~2モル、より好ましくは1~1.5モル、さらに好ましくは1~1.3モルであり、未反応物を低減する観点から、ほぼ等量で反応させることがさらに好ましい。
 工程3は、溶媒の存在下に実施することが好ましい。溶媒としては、水溶性有機溶媒が好ましく、該水溶性有機溶媒としては、例えばメタノール、エタノール等のアルコール類、ジメチルホルムアミド(DMF)等が好ましい。
In step 3, the hydroxylamine source is not particularly limited, but hydroxylamine chloride is preferred. The hydroxylamine chloride can be reacted with, for example, sodium acetate in water to obtain an aqueous solution of hydroxylamine.
The amount of hydroxylamine (hydroxylamine chloride) to be used is preferably 0.8 to 2 mol, more preferably 1 to 1.5 mol, still more preferably 1 to 1.3 mol, relative to 1 mol of the diketone body (6a). From the viewpoint of reducing unreacted substances, it is more preferable to carry out the reaction in substantially the same amount.
Step 3 is preferably performed in the presence of a solvent. As the solvent, a water-soluble organic solvent is preferable, and as the water-soluble organic solvent, for example, alcohols such as methanol and ethanol, dimethylformamide (DMF) and the like are preferable.
 工程3の反応温度に特に制限は無いが、オキシム体(7a)の収率の観点からは、通常、好ましくは40~160℃、より好ましくは50~140℃、さらに好ましくは70~110℃である。反応時間は、ジケトン体(6a)の種類及び使用量、並びに反応温度によっても異なるが、通常、好ましくは2~20時間、より好ましくは4~12時間である。
 工程3の実施形態に特に制限は無く、例えば、塩化ヒドロキシルアミンと酢酸ナトリウムを水中で混合してヒドロキシルアミンの水溶液を得ておき、そこへジケトン体(6a)及び溶媒を添加して、好ましくは前記温度範囲で攪拌することにより、オキシム体(7a)を得ることができる。
 反応終了後、得られた反応混合液から、抽出等の通常の有機化合物の分離手段によって、オキシム体(7a)を得ることができる。適宜、蒸留、カラムクロマトグラフィー、再結晶等の、通常の有機化合物の精製手段によって精製することにより、オキシム体(7a)の純度を高めることもできる。
The reaction temperature in step 3 is not particularly limited, but is usually preferably 40 to 160 ° C., more preferably 50 to 140 ° C., and still more preferably 70 to 110 ° C. from the viewpoint of the yield of the oxime (7a). is there. The reaction time varies depending on the type and amount of diketone (6a) and the reaction temperature, but is usually preferably 2 to 20 hours, more preferably 4 to 12 hours.
There is no particular limitation on the embodiment of Step 3, for example, hydroxylamine chloride and sodium acetate are mixed in water to obtain an aqueous solution of hydroxylamine, and a diketone (6a) and a solvent are added thereto. An oxime body (7a) can be obtained by stirring in the said temperature range.
After completion of the reaction, the oxime body (7a) can be obtained from the resulting reaction mixture by an ordinary organic compound separation means such as extraction. The purity of the oxime body (7a) can also be increased by appropriately purifying by a usual means for purifying organic compounds such as distillation, column chromatography, recrystallization and the like.
(工程4)
 工程4は、工程3で得られたオキシム体(7a)と下記一般式(8)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
(式中、Yは、ハロゲン原子又は-OC(=O)R1を示す。R1は、前記定義の通りであり、好ましいものも同じである。)
で表されるエステル化剤[以下、エステル化剤(8)と称する。]とを反応させることにより、下記一般式(I-a)
(Process 4)
Step 4 includes the oxime body (7a) obtained in Step 3 and the following general formula (8):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
(In the formula, Y represents a halogen atom or —OC (═O) R 1. R 1 is as defined above, and preferred ones are also the same.)
The esterifying agent represented by the formula [hereinafter referred to as the esterifying agent (8). And the following general formula (Ia):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
(式中、R1~R11及びArは、前記定義の通りである。)
で表される光重合開始剤[以下、光重合開始剤(I-a)と称する。]を得る工程である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
(Wherein R 1 to R 11 and Ar are as defined above.)
[Hereinafter referred to as photopolymerization initiator (Ia)]. ] Is a step of obtaining.
 上記式中、Yが示すハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子等が挙げられ、塩素原子が好ましい。
 工程4で使用するエステル化剤(8)の使用量に特に制限は無いが、オキシム体(7a)1モルに対して、好ましくは0.5~2モル、より好ましくは0.8~1.2モルであり、未反応物を低減する観点から、ほぼ等量で反応させることがさらに好ましい。
 工程4は、反応を促進するために、塩基の存在下に実施してもよい。塩基としては、有機塩基や無機塩基が挙げられる。有機塩基としては、例えばトリエチルアミン、トリブチルアミン等のアミン類;ピリジン等の含窒素複素環式芳香族化合物等が挙げられる。無機塩基としては、例えば炭酸ナトリウム等のアルカリ金属炭酸塩;炭酸マグネシウム等のアルカリ土類金属炭酸塩;水酸化ナトリウム等のアルカリ金属水酸化物;水酸化マグネシウム等のアルカリ土類金属水酸化物等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、有機塩基が好ましく、アミン類、含窒素複素環式芳香族化合物がより好ましく、反応効率及び製造コストの観点から、トリエチルアミン、ピリジンがさらに好ましい。
 塩基を使用する場合、その使用量は、光重合開始剤(I-a)の収率及び製造コストの観点から、オキシム体(7a)1モルに対して、好ましくは1~5モル、より好ましくは1.5~3モルである。
In the above formula, examples of the halogen atom represented by Y include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom, and a chlorine atom is preferable.
Although there is no restriction | limiting in particular in the usage-amount of the esterifying agent (8) used at the process 4, Preferably it is 0.5-2 mol with respect to 1 mol of oxime bodies (7a), More preferably, it is 0.8-1. From the viewpoint of reducing unreacted substances, it is more preferable to carry out the reaction in substantially the same amount.
Step 4 may be performed in the presence of a base to promote the reaction. Examples of the base include organic bases and inorganic bases. Examples of the organic base include amines such as triethylamine and tributylamine; nitrogen-containing heterocyclic aromatic compounds such as pyridine. Examples of the inorganic base include alkali metal carbonates such as sodium carbonate; alkaline earth metal carbonates such as magnesium carbonate; alkali metal hydroxides such as sodium hydroxide; alkaline earth metal hydroxides such as magnesium hydroxide Is mentioned. Among these, organic bases are preferable, amines and nitrogen-containing heterocyclic aromatic compounds are more preferable, and triethylamine and pyridine are more preferable from the viewpoint of reaction efficiency and production cost.
When a base is used, the amount used is preferably 1 to 5 moles, more preferably 1 mole relative to 1 mole of the oxime (7a), from the viewpoint of the yield of the photopolymerization initiator (Ia) and the production cost. Is 1.5 to 3 moles.
 工程4は、溶媒の存在下に実施することが好ましい。溶媒としては、t-ブチルメチルエーテル、エチルメチルエーテル、シクロペンチルメチルエーテル、テトラヒドロフラン(THF)等のエーテル類が好ましく挙げられる。
 工程4の反応温度は、反応開始時は-50~5℃(好ましくは-10~5℃)とし、反応が進行するにしたがって、徐々に室温(15~25℃程度)へ戻すことが好ましい。反応時間は、オキシム体(7a)、エステル化剤(8)の種類及び使用量、並びに反応温度によっても異なるが、通常、好ましくは0.5~10時間、より好ましくは1~5時間である。
 工程4の実施形態に特に制限は無く、例えばオキシム体(7a)及びエステル化剤(8)を適宜溶媒中で混合し、そこへ塩基を滴下し、滴下終了後、反応液の温度を徐々に室温へ戻して攪拌を続けることにより、本発明の光重合開始剤(I-a)を得ることができる。
 反応終了後、得られた反応混合液から、抽出等の通常の有機化合物の分離手段によって、光重合開始剤(I-a)を得ることができる。適宜、蒸留、カラムクロマトグラフィー、再結晶等の、通常の有機化合物の精製手段によって精製することにより、光重合開始剤(I-a)の純度を高めることもできる。
Step 4 is preferably performed in the presence of a solvent. Preferred examples of the solvent include ethers such as t-butyl methyl ether, ethyl methyl ether, cyclopentyl methyl ether, and tetrahydrofuran (THF).
The reaction temperature in step 4 is preferably −50 to 5 ° C. (preferably −10 to 5 ° C.) at the start of the reaction, and gradually returned to room temperature (about 15 to 25 ° C.) as the reaction proceeds. The reaction time varies depending on the type and amount of the oxime (7a) and esterifying agent (8), and the reaction temperature, but is usually preferably 0.5 to 10 hours, more preferably 1 to 5 hours. .
There is no restriction | limiting in particular in embodiment of process 4, For example, an oxime body (7a) and an esterifying agent (8) are mixed in a solvent suitably, a base is dripped there, and the temperature of a reaction liquid is made gradually after completion | finish of dripping. By returning to room temperature and continuing stirring, the photopolymerization initiator (Ia) of the present invention can be obtained.
After completion of the reaction, the photopolymerization initiator (Ia) can be obtained from the resulting reaction mixture by an ordinary organic compound separation means such as extraction. The purity of the photopolymerization initiator (Ia) can also be increased by appropriately purifying by a usual organic compound purification means such as distillation, column chromatography or recrystallization.
 こうして得られる本発明の光重合開始剤(I-a)は、カルバゾール骨格中の窒素原子に、エステル基を含有する特殊な置換基が付いている。そのため、光硬化性組成物中のエチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物(特に(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基を有する化合物)、エーテル結合及び/又はエステル結合を有する25℃で液体の化合物との相溶性、及び溶剤(前記のエーテル結合及び/又はエステル結合を有する25℃で液体の化合物を含む。)に対する溶解性が高く、光(特に波長450nm以下の短波長の光)に対する感度が高く、解像度及び現像性、ひいては深部硬化性に優れ、さらに基板との密着性が良好になるものと考えられる。また、該光重合開始剤(I-a)は、露光時の光により発生する分解物による重合物の汚染や装置の汚染が無い。
 なお、特定化合物や溶剤に対する光重合開始剤(I-a)の相溶性や溶解性の高さは、感度、解像度及び現像性、ひいては深部硬化性の向上に寄与しているものと考えられ、カラーフィルタ用途においては重要な要素であると言える。特にカラーフィルタ用途においては、光重合開始剤が、エーテル結合及び/又はエステル結合を有する溶剤(特に、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート等)100質量部に対して、5質量部以上溶解することが好ましく、10質量部以上溶解することがさらに好ましく、本発明の光重合開始剤(I-a)はかかる条件を満たしており、カラーフィルタ用光硬化性組成物に含有させる光重合開始剤、さらには高遮光性のブラックマトリックス用光硬化性組成物に含有させる光重合開始剤として適している。
The photopolymerization initiator (Ia) of the present invention thus obtained has a special substituent containing an ester group attached to the nitrogen atom in the carbazole skeleton. Therefore, compatibility with a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond in the photocurable composition (particularly a compound having a (meth) acryloyloxy group), a compound having an ether bond and / or an ester bond and liquid at 25 ° C., And a solvent (including a compound having an ether bond and / or ester bond and a liquid at 25 ° C.), high sensitivity to light (especially light having a short wavelength of 450 nm or less), resolution and development It is considered that the properties and the deep part curability are excellent, and the adhesion to the substrate is further improved. In addition, the photopolymerization initiator (Ia) is free from contamination of the polymer or apparatus due to decomposition products generated by light during exposure.
Note that the high compatibility and solubility of the photopolymerization initiator (Ia) with respect to the specific compound or solvent is considered to contribute to the improvement of sensitivity, resolution and developability, and thus deep curability. It can be said that this is an important factor in color filter applications. Particularly in color filter applications, the photopolymerization initiator is preferably dissolved in an amount of 5 parts by mass or more with respect to 100 parts by mass of a solvent having an ether bond and / or an ester bond (particularly propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate). More preferably, 10 parts by mass or more is dissolved, and the photopolymerization initiator (Ia) of the present invention satisfies such conditions, and is included in the photocurable composition for color filters, It is suitable as a photopolymerization initiator to be contained in a highly light-shielding photocurable composition for black matrix.
(1.光重合開始剤(I-a)の製造方法)
 本発明の光重合開始剤(I-b)の製造方法に特に制限は無いが、例えば、下記工程1~工程4によって、容易に製造することができる。
(1. Method for producing photopolymerization initiator (Ia))
The method for producing the photopolymerization initiator (Ib) of the present invention is not particularly limited, but can be easily produced by, for example, the following steps 1 to 4.
(工程1)
 工程1は、W及びZによって製造方法が異なるため、以下に場合分けして説明する。
<Wが単結合であり、Zが>NR3’である場合>
 下記一般式(1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
(式中、R6~R11は、前記定義の通りであり、好ましいものも同じである。)
で表されるカルバゾール誘導体[以下、カルバゾール誘導体(1)と称する。]と、下記一般式(2b)
(Process 1)
Since the manufacturing method of Step 1 is different depending on W and Z, each case will be described below.
<When W is a single bond and Z is> NR 3 '>
The following general formula (1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
(Wherein R 6 to R 11 are as defined above, and preferred ones are also the same.)
[Hereinafter referred to as a carbazole derivative (1). And the following general formula (2b)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
(式中、R3、R3’、R4及びR5は、前記定義の通りであり、好ましいものも同じである。)
で表されるアクリルアミド誘導体[以下、アクリルアミド誘導体(2b)と称する。]とを塩基の存在下に反応させることにより、下記一般式(3b)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
(In the formula, R 3 , R 3 ′, R 4 and R 5 are as defined above, and preferred ones are also the same.)
[Hereinafter referred to as acrylamide derivative (2b). And in the presence of a base, the following general formula (3b)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
(式中、R3、R3’、R4~R11は、前記定義の通りであり、好ましいものも同じである。)
で表されるアミド基導入体[以下、アミド基導入体(3b)と称する。]を得る工程である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
(In the formula, R 3 , R 3 ′ and R 4 to R 11 are as defined above, and preferred ones are also the same.)
[In the following, it is referred to as an amide group introduced product (3b). ] Is a step of obtaining.
 工程1で使用するアクリルアミド誘導体(2b)の使用量に特に制限は無いが、カルバゾール誘導体(1)1モルに対して、好ましくは0.5~2モル、より好ましくは0.8~1.2モルであり、未反応物を低減する観点から、ほぼ等量で反応させることがさらに好ましい。
 工程1は、塩基の存在下に実施する。該塩基としては、Michael付加反応に使用し得る塩基を用いることができ、特に制限は無く、有機塩基、無機塩基のいずれも用いることができる。有機塩基としては、例えばピリジン、ジアザビシクロウンデセン(DBU)、ジアザビシクロノネン(DBN)等が挙げられ、求核性の低い塩基が好ましく、DBU、DBNがより好ましい。無機塩基としては、例えば、炭酸ナトリウム、炭酸カリウム等のアルカリ金属炭酸塩;炭酸マグネシウム、炭酸カルシウム等のアルカリ土類金属炭酸塩;炭酸水素ナトリウム、炭酸水素カリウム等のアルカリ金属炭酸水素塩;水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム等のアルカリ金属水酸化物;水酸化マグネシウム、水酸化カルシウム等のアルカリ土類金属水酸化物等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、アルカリ金属炭酸塩、アルカリ土類金属炭酸塩が好ましく、アルカリ金属炭酸塩がより好ましく、炭酸カリウムがさらに好ましい。
 該塩基の使用量に特に制限は無いが、反応効率及び製造コストの観点から、カルバゾール誘導体(1)1モルに対して、好ましくは0.5~2モル、より好ましくは0.8~1.2モルであり、ほぼ等量で使用することがさらに好ましい。
 工程1は、溶媒の存在下に実施することが好ましい。該溶媒としては、カルバゾール誘導体(1)、アクリルアミド誘導体(2b)及び塩基を溶解し得る溶媒を適宜選択すればよい。具体的には、ジメチルホルムアミド(DMF)、ジメチスルホキシド(DMSO)、塩化メチレン等が挙げられる。
The amount of the acrylamide derivative (2b) used in Step 1 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.5 to 2 mol, more preferably 0.8 to 1.2, relative to 1 mol of the carbazole derivative (1). From the viewpoint of reducing unreacted substances, it is more preferable to carry out the reaction in substantially equal amounts.
Step 1 is performed in the presence of a base. As the base, a base that can be used in the Michael addition reaction can be used, and there is no particular limitation, and either an organic base or an inorganic base can be used. Examples of the organic base include pyridine, diazabicycloundecene (DBU), diazabicyclononene (DBN) and the like, and bases having low nucleophilicity are preferable, and DBU and DBN are more preferable. Examples of the inorganic base include alkali metal carbonates such as sodium carbonate and potassium carbonate; alkaline earth metal carbonates such as magnesium carbonate and calcium carbonate; alkali metal hydrogen carbonates such as sodium hydrogen carbonate and potassium hydrogen carbonate; Examples include alkali metal hydroxides such as sodium and potassium hydroxide; alkaline earth metal hydroxides such as magnesium hydroxide and calcium hydroxide. Among these, alkali metal carbonates and alkaline earth metal carbonates are preferable, alkali metal carbonates are more preferable, and potassium carbonate is more preferable.
The amount of the base to be used is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of reaction efficiency and production cost, it is preferably 0.5 to 2 mol, more preferably 0.8 to 1. mol per mol of the carbazole derivative (1). More preferably, it is 2 moles and is used in an approximately equal amount.
Step 1 is preferably performed in the presence of a solvent. What is necessary is just to select suitably the solvent which can melt | dissolve a carbazole derivative (1), an acrylamide derivative (2b), and a base as this solvent. Specific examples include dimethylformamide (DMF), dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO), methylene chloride and the like.
 工程1の反応温度に特に制限は無いが、通常、好ましくは10~50℃、より好ましくは15~40℃、さらに好ましくは15~30℃で実施する。反応圧力に特に制限は無いが、常圧下に実施することが好ましい。反応時間は、カルバゾール誘導体(1)、アクリルアミド誘導体(2b)及び塩基の種類や使用量並びに反応温度や反応圧力等によっても異なるが、通常、好ましくは2時間~48時間程度である。
 工程1の実施形態に特に制限は無く、例えばカルバゾール誘導体(1)、アクリルアミド誘導体(2b)及び塩基を全て溶媒中に添加し、好ましくは前記温度で攪拌することにより、アミド基導入体(3b)を製造することができる。
 反応終了後、得られた反応混合液から、抽出等の通常の有機化合物の分離手段によって、アミド基導入体(3b)を得ることができる。適宜、蒸留、カラムクロマトグラフィー、再結晶等の、通常の有機化合物の精製手段によって精製することにより、アミド基導入体(3b)の純度を高めることもできる。
The reaction temperature in step 1 is not particularly limited, but is usually preferably 10 to 50 ° C, more preferably 15 to 40 ° C, and further preferably 15 to 30 ° C. Although there is no restriction | limiting in particular in reaction pressure, Implementing under a normal pressure is preferable. The reaction time varies depending on the kind and amount of the carbazole derivative (1), acrylamide derivative (2b) and base, reaction temperature, reaction pressure, etc., but is usually preferably about 2 to 48 hours.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular in embodiment of process 1, For example, carbazole derivative (1), acrylamide derivative (2b), and a base are all added to a solvent, Preferably it is stirred at the said temperature, Amide group introduction body (3b) Can be manufactured.
After the completion of the reaction, the amide group-introduced product (3b) can be obtained from the resulting reaction mixture by an ordinary organic compound separation means such as extraction. The purity of the amide group-introduced product (3b) can also be increased by appropriately purifying by a usual organic compound purification means such as distillation, column chromatography, recrystallization and the like.
-別法-
 アミド基導入体(3b)の製造には、次の方法を採用することもできる。
 前記カルバゾール誘導体(1)と下記一般式(2b’)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
(式中、R4及びR5は前記定義の通りである。R24は、炭素数1~5のアルキル基を示す。)
で表されるカルボン酸基導入剤[以下、カルボン酸基導入剤(2b’)と称する。]とを塩基の存在下に反応(第1反応)させて得られる下記一般式
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
(式中、R4~R11は、前記定義の通りであり、好ましいものも同じである。)
で表されるカルボン酸基含有カルバゾール誘導体を、例えば塩化チオニルの存在下にHNR33'(R3及びR3'は、前記定義の通りであり、好ましいものも同じである。)で表されるアミンと反応(第2反応)させることにより、アミド基導入体(3b)を得る方法である。該アミド基導入体(3b)としては、市販品を用いることもできる。
 なお、R24が示す炭素数1~5のアルキル基としては、例えばメチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、イソプロピル基、n-ブチル基、イソブチル基、t-ブチル基等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、メチル基、エチル基が好ましい。
-Alternative method-
The following method can also be adopted for the production of the amide group-introduced product (3b).
The carbazole derivative (1) and the following general formula (2b ′)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
(In the formula, R 4 and R 5 are as defined above. R 24 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.)
[Hereinafter referred to as a carboxylic acid group introducing agent (2b ′). ] In the presence of a base (first reaction)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
(Wherein R 4 to R 11 are as defined above, and preferred ones are also the same).
In the presence of thionyl chloride, for example, HNR 3 R 3 ′ (R 3 and R 3 ′ are as defined above, and preferred ones are also the same). This is a method for obtaining an amide group-introduced product (3b) by reacting with the amine to be reacted (second reaction). A commercial item can also be used as this amide group introduction | transduction body (3b).
Examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms represented by R 24 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an isopropyl group, an n-butyl group, an isobutyl group, and a t-butyl group. Among these, a methyl group and an ethyl group are preferable.
 前記第1反応で使用する塩基としては特に制限は無く、有機塩基、無機塩基のいずれも用いることができる。有機塩基としては、例えばピリジン、ジアザビシクロウンデセン(DBU)、ジアザビシクロノネン(DBN)等が挙げられ、求核性の低い塩基が好ましく、DBU、DBNがより好ましい。無機塩基としては、例えば、炭酸ナトリウム、炭酸カリウム等のアルカリ金属炭酸塩;炭酸マグネシウム、炭酸カルシウム等のアルカリ土類金属炭酸塩;炭酸水素ナトリウム、炭酸水素カリウム等のアルカリ金属炭酸水素塩;水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム等のアルカリ金属水酸化物;水酸化マグネシウム、水酸化カルシウム等のアルカリ土類金属水酸化物等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、塩基としては、無機塩基が好ましく、アルカリ金属水酸化物がより好ましい。
 該塩基の使用量に特に制限は無いが、反応効率及び製造コストの観点から、カルバゾール誘導体(1)1モルに対して、好ましくは0.5~2モル、より好ましくは0.8~1.2モルであり、ほぼ等量で使用することがさらに好ましい。
 第1反応は、溶媒の存在下に実施することが好ましい。溶媒としては、カルバゾール誘導体(1)、カルボン酸基導入剤(2b’)及び前記塩基を溶解し得る溶媒を適宜選択すればよい。具体的には、ジメチルホルムアミド(DMF)、ジメチスルホキシド(DMSO)、塩化メチレン等が挙げられ、DMFが好ましい。
There is no restriction | limiting in particular as a base used by said 1st reaction, Both an organic base and an inorganic base can be used. Examples of the organic base include pyridine, diazabicycloundecene (DBU), diazabicyclononene (DBN) and the like, and bases having low nucleophilicity are preferable, and DBU and DBN are more preferable. Examples of the inorganic base include alkali metal carbonates such as sodium carbonate and potassium carbonate; alkaline earth metal carbonates such as magnesium carbonate and calcium carbonate; alkali metal hydrogen carbonates such as sodium hydrogen carbonate and potassium hydrogen carbonate; Examples include alkali metal hydroxides such as sodium and potassium hydroxide; alkaline earth metal hydroxides such as magnesium hydroxide and calcium hydroxide. Among these, as the base, an inorganic base is preferable, and an alkali metal hydroxide is more preferable.
The amount of the base to be used is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of reaction efficiency and production cost, it is preferably 0.5 to 2 mol, more preferably 0.8 to 1. mol per mol of the carbazole derivative (1). More preferably, it is 2 moles and is used in an approximately equal amount.
The first reaction is preferably carried out in the presence of a solvent. As the solvent, a solvent capable of dissolving the carbazole derivative (1), the carboxylic acid group introducing agent (2b ′) and the base may be appropriately selected. Specific examples include dimethylformamide (DMF), dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO), methylene chloride and the like, with DMF being preferred.
 第1反応の反応温度に特に制限は無いが、通常、好ましくは10~50℃、より好ましくは15~40℃、さらに好ましくは15~30℃で実施する。第1反応の反応圧力に特に制限は無いが、常圧下に実施することが好ましい。反応時間は、カルバゾール誘導体(1)及び塩基の種類や使用量、及びカルボン酸基導入剤(2b’)の使用量並びに反応温度及び反応圧力等によっても異なるが、通常、好ましくは2時間~48時間程度である。
 第1反応の実施形態に特に制限は無く、例えばカルバゾール誘導体(1)、カルボン酸基導入剤(2b’)及び塩基を全て溶媒中に添加し、好ましくは前記温度で攪拌することにより、カルボン酸基含有カルバゾール誘導体を製造することができる。
 第1反応終了後、抽出等の通常の有機化合物の分離手段によって、前記カルボン酸基含有カルバゾール誘導体を得ることができる。適宜、蒸留、カラムクロマトグラフィー、再結晶等の、通常の有機化合物の精製手段によって精製することにより、該カルボン酸基含有カルバゾール誘導体の純度を高めることもできる。
The reaction temperature of the first reaction is not particularly limited, but is usually preferably 10 to 50 ° C, more preferably 15 to 40 ° C, and further preferably 15 to 30 ° C. Although there is no restriction | limiting in particular in the reaction pressure of 1st reaction, Implementing under a normal pressure is preferable. The reaction time varies depending on the type and amount of the carbazole derivative (1) and the base, the amount of the carboxylic acid group introducing agent (2b ′), the reaction temperature, the reaction pressure, etc., but it is usually preferably 2 hours to 48 hours. It is about time.
There is no particular limitation on the embodiment of the first reaction. For example, the carbazole derivative (1), the carboxylic acid group introducing agent (2b ′) and the base are all added to the solvent, and preferably stirred at the above temperature to obtain the carboxylic acid. A group-containing carbazole derivative can be produced.
After completion of the first reaction, the carboxylic acid group-containing carbazole derivative can be obtained by an ordinary organic compound separation means such as extraction. The purity of the carboxylic acid group-containing carbazole derivative can be increased by appropriately purifying by a usual organic compound purification means such as distillation, column chromatography, recrystallization and the like.
 第2反応で使用する塩化チオニルの使用量は、第1反応で使用するカルバゾール誘導体(1)1モルに対して、好ましくは1~10モル程度使用すればよく、より好ましくは2~5モル程度である。
 第2反応で使用するHNR33'で表されるアミンの使用量は、第1反応で使用するカルバゾール誘導体(1)1モルに対して、好ましくは1~10モル程度使用すればよく、より好ましくは2~7モル程度である。
 第2反応は、溶媒の存在下に実施することが好ましい。溶媒としては、前記カルボン酸基含有カルバゾール誘導体、前記アミンを溶解し得る溶媒であれば特に制限は無い。例えば、ジクロロメタン、ニトロベンゼン、アセトン、アセトニトリル等が挙げられ、アセトニトリルが好ましい。
The amount of thionyl chloride used in the second reaction is preferably about 1 to 10 mol, more preferably about 2 to 5 mol, per 1 mol of the carbazole derivative (1) used in the first reaction. It is.
The amount of the amine represented by HNR 3 R 3 ′ used in the second reaction is preferably about 1 to 10 mol per 1 mol of the carbazole derivative (1) used in the first reaction. More preferably, it is about 2 to 7 mol.
The second reaction is preferably carried out in the presence of a solvent. The solvent is not particularly limited as long as it is a solvent capable of dissolving the carboxylic acid group-containing carbazole derivative and the amine. For example, dichloromethane, nitrobenzene, acetone, acetonitrile and the like can be mentioned, and acetonitrile is preferable.
 第2反応の反応温度に特に制限は無いが、通常、好ましくは10~50℃、より好ましくは15~40℃、さらに好ましくは15~30℃で実施する。第2反応の反応圧力に特に制限は無いが、常圧下に実施することが好ましい。反応時間は、前記カルボン酸基含有カルバゾール誘導体、前記アミン及び塩基の種類や使用量並びに反応温度及び反応圧力等によっても異なるが、通常、好ましくは1時間~10時間程度である。
 第2反応の実施形態に特に制限は無いが、例えば前記カルボン酸基含有カルバゾール誘導体と前記アミンとを溶媒中に添加し、そこへ塩化チオニルを滴下し、滴下終了後、好ましくは前記温度で攪拌することにより、アミド基導入体(3b)を製造することができる。
 反応終了後、得られた反応混合液から、抽出等の通常の有機化合物の分離手段によって、アミド基導入体(3b)を得ることができる。適宜、蒸留、カラムクロマトグラフィー、再結晶等の、通常の有機化合物の精製手段によって精製することにより、アミド基導入体(3b)の純度を高めることもできる。
The reaction temperature of the second reaction is not particularly limited, but is usually preferably 10 to 50 ° C, more preferably 15 to 40 ° C, and further preferably 15 to 30 ° C. Although there is no restriction | limiting in particular in the reaction pressure of 2nd reaction, Implementing under a normal pressure is preferable. The reaction time varies depending on the kinds and amounts of the carboxylic acid group-containing carbazole derivative, the amine and the base, the reaction temperature, the reaction pressure, and the like, but is usually preferably about 1 to 10 hours.
The embodiment of the second reaction is not particularly limited. For example, the carboxylic acid group-containing carbazole derivative and the amine are added to a solvent, and thionyl chloride is added dropwise thereto. After completion of the addition, stirring is preferably performed at the temperature. By doing so, an amide group-introduced product (3b) can be produced.
After the completion of the reaction, the amide group-introduced product (3b) can be obtained from the resulting reaction mixture by an ordinary organic compound separation means such as extraction. The purity of the amide group-introduced product (3b) can also be increased by appropriately purifying by a usual organic compound purification means such as distillation, column chromatography, recrystallization and the like.
<Wが酸素原子であり、Zが単結合である場合>
 前記カルバゾール誘導体(1)と炭酸エチレンを塩基の存在下に反応(第1反応)させて得られる、下記一般式
<When W is an oxygen atom and Z is a single bond>
The following general formula obtained by reacting the carbazole derivative (1) with ethylene carbonate in the presence of a base (first reaction).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
(式中、R6~R11は、前記定義の通りであり、好ましいものも同じである。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
(Wherein R 6 to R 11 are as defined above, and preferred ones are also the same.)
で表されるヒドロキシル基含有カルバゾール誘導体を、塩基の存在下にR3COY(R3は、前記定義の通りであり、好ましいものも同じである。また、Yは、ハロゲン原子を示す。)で表されるアシルハライドと反応(第2反応)させることにより、下記一般式(3b’)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
(式中、R3~R11は、前記定義の通りであり、好ましいものも同じである。)
で表されるエステル基導入体[以下、エステル基導入体(3b’)と称する。]を得る方法が好ましい。
In the presence of a base, the hydroxyl group-containing carbazole derivative is R 3 COY (where R 3 is as defined above, and the preferred one is also the same. Y represents a halogen atom). By reacting with the acyl halide represented (second reaction), the following general formula (3b ′)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
(Wherein R 3 to R 11 are as defined above, and preferred ones are also the same).
An ester group-introduced body represented by the formula [hereinafter referred to as an ester group-introduced body (3b ′). ] Is preferable.
 前記第1反応で使用する炭酸エチレンの使用量は、カルバゾール誘導体(1)1モルに対して、好ましくは0.7~15モル、より好ましくは1~10モルである。
 第1反応で使用する塩基としては、有機塩基が好ましく、例えばトリエチルアミン、トリブチルアミン等のアミン類;ピリジン等の含窒素複素環式芳香族化合物等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、アミン類が好ましく、トリエチルアミンがより好ましい。該塩基の使用量に特に制限は無いが、反応効率及び製造コストの観点から、カルバゾール誘導体(1)1モルに対して、好ましくは0.5~2モル、より好ましくは0.8~1.2モルであり、ほぼ等量で使用することがさらに好ましい。
 第1反応は、溶媒の存在下に実施することが好ましい。溶媒としては、カルバゾール誘導体(1)や炭酸エチレン、並びに前記塩基を溶解し得る溶媒を適宜選択すればよい。具体的には、ジメチルホルムアミド(DMF)、ジメチスルホキシド(DMSO)、塩化メチレン等が挙げられ、DMFが好ましい。
The amount of ethylene carbonate used in the first reaction is preferably 0.7 to 15 mol, more preferably 1 to 10 mol, relative to 1 mol of the carbazole derivative (1).
The base used in the first reaction is preferably an organic base, and examples thereof include amines such as triethylamine and tributylamine; nitrogen-containing heterocyclic aromatic compounds such as pyridine. Among these, amines are preferable, and triethylamine is more preferable. The amount of the base to be used is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of reaction efficiency and production cost, it is preferably 0.5 to 2 mol, more preferably 0.8 to 1. mol per mol of the carbazole derivative (1). More preferably, it is 2 moles and is used in an approximately equal amount.
The first reaction is preferably carried out in the presence of a solvent. What is necessary is just to select suitably the solvent which can melt | dissolve a carbazole derivative (1), ethylene carbonate, and the said base as a solvent. Specific examples include dimethylformamide (DMF), dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO), methylene chloride and the like, with DMF being preferred.
 第1反応の反応温度に特に制限は無いが、通常、好ましくは60~130℃、より好ましくは80~120℃、さらに好ましくは90~110℃で実施する。第1反応の反応圧力に特に制限は無いが、常圧下に実施することが好ましい。反応時間は、カルバゾール誘導体(1)及び塩基の種類や使用量、炭酸エチレンの使用量、並びに反応温度及び反応圧力等によっても異なるが、通常、好ましくは1時間~10時間程度である。
 第1反応の実施形態に特に制限は無く、例えばカルバゾール誘導体(1)、炭酸エチレン及び塩基を全て溶媒中に添加し、好ましくは前記温度で攪拌することにより、前記ヒドロキシル基含有カルバゾール誘導体を製造することができる。
 第1反応終了後、得られた反応混合液から、抽出等の通常の有機化合物の分離手段によって、前記ヒドロキシル基含有カルバゾール誘導体を得ることができる。適宜、蒸留、カラムクロマトグラフィー、再結晶等の、通常の有機化合物の精製手段によって精製することにより、該ヒドロキシル基含有カルバゾール誘導体の純度を高めることもできる。
The reaction temperature of the first reaction is not particularly limited, but is usually preferably 60 to 130 ° C, more preferably 80 to 120 ° C, and further preferably 90 to 110 ° C. Although there is no restriction | limiting in particular in the reaction pressure of 1st reaction, Implementing under a normal pressure is preferable. The reaction time varies depending on the type and amount of the carbazole derivative (1) and base, the amount of ethylene carbonate used, the reaction temperature, the reaction pressure, etc., but it is usually preferably about 1 to 10 hours.
The embodiment of the first reaction is not particularly limited, and for example, the carbazole derivative (1), ethylene carbonate, and base are all added to a solvent, and preferably stirred at the temperature to produce the hydroxyl group-containing carbazole derivative. be able to.
After the completion of the first reaction, the hydroxyl group-containing carbazole derivative can be obtained from the resulting reaction mixture by an ordinary organic compound separation means such as extraction. The purity of the hydroxyl group-containing carbazole derivative can also be increased by appropriately purifying by an ordinary organic compound purification means such as distillation, column chromatography, recrystallization and the like.
 第2反応で使用するR3COYで表されるアシルハライドとしては、アシルクロリド、アシルヨージド等が挙げられ、アシルクロリドが好ましい。
 該アシルハライドの使用量は、第1反応で使用するカルバゾール誘導体(1)1モルに対して、好ましくは0.7~3モル程度、より好ましくは1~2モルであり、ほぼ等量で使用することがさらに好ましい。
 第2反応で使用する塩基としては、例えばトリエチルアミン、トリブチルアミン、ジイソプロピルエチルアミン等のアミン類が好ましい。塩基の使用量は、前記アシルハライド1モルに対して、好ましくは0.7~3モル程度、より好ましくは1~2モルであり、ほぼ等量で使用することがさらに好ましい。
 第2反応は、溶媒の存在下に実施することが好ましい。溶媒としては、通常のアシル化反応に使用し得る溶媒を使用でき、反応を阻害しない限り特に制限は無い。具体的には、ジクロロメタン、ニトロベンゼン、アセトン、アセトニトリル等が挙げられ、アセトニトリルが好ましい。
Examples of the acyl halide represented by R 3 COY used in the second reaction include acyl chloride and acyl iodide, and acyl chloride is preferred.
The amount of the acyl halide used is preferably about 0.7 to 3 mol, more preferably 1 to 2 mol, based on 1 mol of the carbazole derivative (1) used in the first reaction. More preferably.
As the base used in the second reaction, for example, amines such as triethylamine, tributylamine and diisopropylethylamine are preferable. The amount of the base used is preferably about 0.7 to 3 mol, more preferably 1 to 2 mol, more preferably about 1 to 2 mol, relative to 1 mol of the acyl halide.
The second reaction is preferably carried out in the presence of a solvent. As the solvent, a solvent that can be used in a usual acylation reaction can be used, and there is no particular limitation as long as the reaction is not inhibited. Specific examples include dichloromethane, nitrobenzene, acetone, acetonitrile and the like, and acetonitrile is preferred.
 第2反応の反応温度に特に制限は無いが、通常、好ましくは10~50℃、より好ましくは15~40℃、さらに好ましくは15~30℃で実施する。第2反応の反応圧力に特に制限は無いが、常圧下に実施することが好ましい。反応時間は、前記ヒドロキシル基含有カルバゾール誘導体、前記アシルハライド及び塩基の種類や使用量並びに反応温度及び反応圧力等によっても異なるが、通常、好ましくは1時間~10時間程度である。
 第2反応の実施形態に特に制限は無いが、例えば前記ヒドロキシル基含有カルバゾール誘導体と前記アシルハライドと塩基とを全て溶媒中に添加し、好ましくは前記温度で攪拌することにより、エステル基導入体(3b’)を製造することができる。
 反応終了後、得られた反応混合液から、抽出等の通常の有機化合物の分離手段によって、エステル基導入体(3b’)を得ることができる。適宜、蒸留、カラムクロマトグラフィー、再結晶等の、通常の有機化合物の精製手段によって精製することにより、エステル基導入体(3b’)の純度を高めることもできる。
The reaction temperature of the second reaction is not particularly limited, but is usually preferably 10 to 50 ° C, more preferably 15 to 40 ° C, and further preferably 15 to 30 ° C. Although there is no restriction | limiting in particular in the reaction pressure of 2nd reaction, Implementing under a normal pressure is preferable. The reaction time varies depending on the kinds and amounts of the hydroxyl group-containing carbazole derivative, the acyl halide and the base, the reaction temperature, the reaction pressure, and the like, but is usually preferably about 1 to 10 hours.
Although there is no restriction | limiting in particular in embodiment of 2nd reaction, For example, by adding all the said hydroxyl group containing carbazole derivatives, the said acyl halide, and a base in a solvent and preferably stirring at the said temperature, ester group introduction body ( 3b ′) can be produced.
After completion of the reaction, an ester group-introduced product (3b ′) can be obtained from the resulting reaction mixture by a usual organic compound separation means such as extraction. The purity of the ester group-introduced product (3b ′) can also be increased by appropriately purifying by a usual organic compound purification means such as distillation, column chromatography, recrystallization and the like.
(工程2)
 工程2は、工程1で得られたアミド基導入体(3b)又はエステル基導入体(3b’)[以下、便宜上、これらをまとめて、官能基導入体(3b)と称する。]と、下記一般式(4)、(5)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
(式中、Xは、ハロゲン原子又は-OC(=O)Arを示し、X’は、ハロゲン原子又は-OC(=O)R2を示す。Ar及びR2は、前記定義の通りであり、好ましいものも同じである。)
で表される2つのアシル化剤[以下、それぞれアシル化剤(4)、アシル化剤(5)と称する。]とをルイス酸の存在下に反応させることにより、下記一般式(6b)
(Process 2)
In step 2, the amide group introduced body (3b) or ester group introduced body (3b ′) obtained in step 1 [hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as a functional group introduced body (3b) for convenience. ] And the following general formulas (4) and (5)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
(Wherein X represents a halogen atom or —OC (═O) Ar, and X ′ represents a halogen atom or —OC (═O) R 2. Ar and R 2 are as defined above. The preferred ones are also the same.)
These are referred to as acylating agent (4) and acylating agent (5), respectively. In the presence of a Lewis acid, the following general formula (6b)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
(式中、R2~R11、Ar、W及びZは、前記定義の通りであり、好ましいものも同じである。)
で表されるジケトン体[以下、ジケトン体(6b)と称する。]を得る工程である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
(Wherein R 2 to R 11 , Ar, W and Z are as defined above, and preferred ones are also the same).
[Hereinafter referred to as a diketone body (6b). ] Is a step of obtaining.
 上記式中、X、X’がそれぞれ独立に示すハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子等が挙げられ、塩素原子が好ましい。
 工程2において、官能基導入体(3b)と、アシル化剤(4)及び(5)との反応は、目的とするジケトン体(6b)の収率の観点から、官能基導入体(3b)とアシル化剤(4)とを反応させた後、次いでアシル化剤(5)を反応させることが好ましい。
 アシル化剤(4)及び(5)の使用量は、官能基導入体(3b)にそれぞれのアシル基を1つずつ導入する観点から、官能基導入体(3b)1モルに対して、それぞれ好ましくは0.8~1.3モル、より好ましくは1~1.3モルであり、未反応物を低減する観点から、ほぼ等量で反応させることがさらに好ましい。特に、官能基導入体(3b)とアシル化剤(4)とを反応させた後、次いでアシル化剤(5)を反応させる場合には、アシル化剤(5)の使用量は、前記範囲を超えても何ら問題ないが、あまり過剰であってもそれに見合う収率が得られるわけではなく、いたずらに生産コストがかさむことになり得る。
 工程2は、ルイス酸の存在下に実施する。ルイス酸としては、塩化アルミニウム、三フッ化ホウ素ジエチルエーテル錯体が好ましい。ルイス酸の使用量は、ジケトン体(6b)の収率の観点から、アシル化剤(4)又は(5)1モルに対して、通常、好ましくは0.8~2.5モル、より好ましくは1~2モルである。
In the above formula, examples of the halogen atom independently represented by X and X ′ include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom and an iodine atom, and a chlorine atom is preferred.
In step 2, the reaction between the functional group-introduced product (3b) and the acylating agents (4) and (5) is performed in terms of the yield of the desired diketone product (6b). It is preferable to react the acylating agent (5) with the acylating agent (4).
The amount of the acylating agent (4) and (5) used is from the viewpoint of introducing each acyl group into the functional group-introduced body (3b) one by one with respect to 1 mol of the functional group-introduced body (3b). The amount is preferably 0.8 to 1.3 mol, more preferably 1 to 1.3 mol, and it is more preferable to carry out the reaction in substantially the same amount from the viewpoint of reducing unreacted substances. In particular, when the functional group-introduced product (3b) and the acylating agent (4) are reacted, and then the acylating agent (5) is reacted, the amount of the acylating agent (5) used is within the above range. There is no problem if the amount exceeds the limit, but even if the amount is excessively large, the yield corresponding to that is not obtained, and the production cost may be unnecessarily high.
Step 2 is performed in the presence of a Lewis acid. As the Lewis acid, aluminum chloride and boron trifluoride diethyl ether complex are preferable. The amount of Lewis acid used is usually preferably 0.8 to 2.5 mol, more preferably 1 mol per mol of the acylating agent (4) or (5) from the viewpoint of the yield of the diketone body (6b). Is 1 to 2 moles.
 工程2は、溶媒の存在下に実施することが好ましい。該溶媒としては、通常のFriedel-Craftsアシル化反応に使用し得る溶媒であれば特に制限は無い。具体的には、ジクロロメタン、ニトロベンゼン、アセトン、アセトニトリル等が挙げられる。
 工程2の反応温度は、反応開始時は-50~5℃(好ましくは-10~5℃)とし、反応が進行するにしたがって、徐々に室温(15~25℃程度)へ戻すことが好ましい。反応時間は、官能基導入体(3b)、アシル化剤(4)及び(5)の種類及び使用量、並びに反応温度によっても異なるが、通常、好ましくは1~30時間である。なお、アシル化剤(4)及び(5)の両方がハロゲン化アシル又は酸無水物である場合、官能基導入体(3b)とアシル化剤(4)とを反応させた後、生成物を単離することなく引き続きアシル化剤(5)と反応させることもできる。その場合、官能基導入体(3b)とアシル化剤(4)との反応時間は、30分~5時間程度(好ましくは30分~3時間)とし、一方、官能基導入体(3b)とアシル化剤(5)との反応時間を、30分~24時間程度(好ましくは30分~18時間)と長めに設けて十分に反応させることが好ましい。
Step 2 is preferably performed in the presence of a solvent. The solvent is not particularly limited as long as it is a solvent that can be used in a normal Friedel-Crafts acylation reaction. Specific examples include dichloromethane, nitrobenzene, acetone, acetonitrile and the like.
The reaction temperature in step 2 is preferably −50 to 5 ° C. (preferably −10 to 5 ° C.) at the start of the reaction, and gradually returned to room temperature (about 15 to 25 ° C.) as the reaction proceeds. The reaction time varies depending on the type and amount of the functional group-introduced product (3b), the acylating agents (4) and (5), and the reaction temperature, but is usually preferably 1 to 30 hours. When both of the acylating agents (4) and (5) are acyl halides or acid anhydrides, after reacting the functional group-introducing body (3b) with the acylating agent (4), the product is It can also be reacted with the acylating agent (5) without isolation. In that case, the reaction time of the functional group-introduced product (3b) and the acylating agent (4) is about 30 minutes to 5 hours (preferably 30 minutes to 3 hours), while the functional group-introduced product (3b) It is preferable that the reaction time with the acylating agent (5) is set to be as long as about 30 minutes to 24 hours (preferably 30 minutes to 18 hours) for sufficient reaction.
 収率の観点から、工程2の好ましい実施形態の1つを説明する。例えば、氷浴で冷却しながら官能基導入体(3b)を適宜溶媒と混合し、その混合溶液へルイス酸をゆっくり(好ましくは5分~1時間、より好ましくは10分~40分かけて)添加し、添加終了後、アシル化剤(4)をゆっくり(好ましくは5分~1時間、より好ましくは10分~40分かけて)添加し、室温へ戻して一定時間(30分~5時間程度)攪拌を続ける。再び、氷浴で冷却しながらアシル化剤(5)を添加し、そこへルイス酸をゆっくり(好ましくは5分~1時間、より好ましくは10分~40分かけて)添加し、添加終了後、室温へ戻して一定時間(30分~24時間程度)攪拌を続けることにより、ジケトン体(6b)を得ることができる。
 反応終了後、得られた反応混合液から、抽出等の通常の有機化合物の分離手段によって、ジケトン体(6b)を得ることができる。適宜、蒸留、カラムクロマトグラフィー、再結晶等の、通常の有機化合物の精製手段によって精製することにより、ジケトン体(6b)の純度を高めることもできる。
From the viewpoint of yield, one preferred embodiment of step 2 will be described. For example, the functional group-introducing body (3b) is appropriately mixed with a solvent while cooling in an ice bath, and Lewis acid is slowly added to the mixed solution (preferably 5 minutes to 1 hour, more preferably 10 minutes to 40 minutes). After the addition, the acylating agent (4) is slowly added (preferably 5 minutes to 1 hour, more preferably over 10 minutes to 40 minutes), and the temperature is returned to room temperature for a certain time (30 minutes to 5 hours). Degree) Continue stirring. Again, the acylating agent (5) is added while cooling in an ice bath, and the Lewis acid is added slowly (preferably over 5 minutes to 1 hour, more preferably over 10 minutes to 40 minutes). The diketone body (6b) can be obtained by returning to room temperature and continuing stirring for a certain period of time (about 30 minutes to 24 hours).
After completion of the reaction, the diketone body (6b) can be obtained from the resulting reaction mixture by an ordinary organic compound separation means such as extraction. The purity of the diketone body (6b) can also be increased by appropriately purifying by a usual organic compound purification means such as distillation, column chromatography, recrystallization and the like.
(工程3)
 工程3は、工程2で得られたジケトン体(6b)とヒドロキシルアミンを反応させることにより、下記一般式(7b)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
(式中、R2~R11、Ar、W及びZは、前記定義の通りであり、好ましいものも同じである。)
で表されるオキシム体[以下、オキシム体(7b)と称する。]を得る工程である。
(Process 3)
Step 3 is a reaction of the diketone body (6b) obtained in Step 2 with hydroxylamine to give the following general formula (7b):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
(Wherein R 2 to R 11 , Ar, W and Z are as defined above, and preferred ones are also the same).
[Hereinafter referred to as oxime body (7b). ] Is a step of obtaining.
 工程3においては、ヒドロキシルアミン供給源としては、特に制限されるものではないが、塩化ヒドロキシルアミンが好ましい。該塩化ヒドロキシルアミンは、例えば水中で酢酸ナトリウム、等と反応させることにより、ヒドロキシルアミンの水溶液を得ることができる。
 ヒドロキシルアミン(塩化ヒドロキシルアミン)の使用量は、ジケトン体(6b)1モルに対して、好ましくは0.8~2モル、より好ましくは1~1.5モル、さらに好ましくは1~1.3モルであり、未反応物を低減する観点から、ほぼ等量で反応させることがさらに好ましい。
 工程3は、溶媒の存在下に実施することが好ましい。溶媒としては、水溶性有機溶媒が好ましく、該水溶性有機溶媒としては、例えばメタノール、エタノール等のアルコール類、ジメチルホルムアミド(DMF)等が好ましい。
In step 3, the hydroxylamine source is not particularly limited, but hydroxylamine chloride is preferred. The hydroxylamine chloride can be reacted with, for example, sodium acetate in water to obtain an aqueous solution of hydroxylamine.
The amount of hydroxylamine (hydroxylamine chloride) to be used is preferably 0.8 to 2 mol, more preferably 1 to 1.5 mol, and still more preferably 1 to 1.3 mol, relative to 1 mol of the diketone body (6b). From the viewpoint of reducing unreacted substances, it is more preferable to carry out the reaction in substantially equal amounts.
Step 3 is preferably performed in the presence of a solvent. As the solvent, a water-soluble organic solvent is preferable, and as the water-soluble organic solvent, for example, alcohols such as methanol and ethanol, dimethylformamide (DMF) and the like are preferable.
 工程3の反応温度に特に制限は無いが、オキシム体(7b)の収率の観点からは、通常、好ましくは40~160℃、より好ましくは50~140℃、さらに好ましくは70~110℃である。反応時間は、ジケトン体(6b)の種類及び使用量、並びに反応温度によっても異なるが、通常、好ましくは0.5~20時間、より好ましくは1~12時間である。
 工程3の実施形態に特に制限は無く、例えば、塩化ヒドロキシルアミンと酢酸ナトリウムを水中で混合してヒドロキシルアミンの水溶液を得ておき、そこへジケトン体(6b)及び溶媒を添加して、好ましくは前記温度範囲で攪拌することにより、オキシム体(7b)を得ることができる。
 反応終了後、得られた反応混合液から、抽出等の通常の有機化合物の分離手段によって、オキシム体(7b)を得ることができる。適宜、蒸留、カラムクロマトグラフィー、再結晶等の、通常の有機化合物の精製手段によって精製することにより、オキシム体(7b)の純度を高めることもできる。
The reaction temperature in step 3 is not particularly limited, but is usually preferably 40 to 160 ° C., more preferably 50 to 140 ° C., and still more preferably 70 to 110 ° C. from the viewpoint of the yield of the oxime (7b). is there. While the reaction time varies depending on the type and amount of diketone (6b) and the reaction temperature, it is usually preferably 0.5 to 20 hours, more preferably 1 to 12 hours.
There is no particular limitation on the embodiment of Step 3. For example, hydroxylamine chloride and sodium acetate are mixed in water to obtain an aqueous solution of hydroxylamine, and a diketone (6b) and a solvent are added thereto. An oxime body (7b) can be obtained by stirring in the said temperature range.
After completion of the reaction, the oxime body (7b) can be obtained from the resulting reaction mixture by an ordinary organic compound separation means such as extraction. The purity of the oxime body (7b) can also be increased by appropriately purifying it by a usual means for purifying organic compounds such as distillation, column chromatography, recrystallization and the like.
(工程4)
 工程4は、工程3で得られたオキシム体(7b)と下記一般式(8)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
(式中、Yは、ハロゲン原子又は-OC(=O)R1を示す。R1は、前記定義の通りであり、好ましいものも同じである。)
で表されるエステル化剤[以下、エステル化剤(8)と称する。]とを反応させることにより、下記一般式(I-b)
(Process 4)
Step 4 includes the oxime body (7b) obtained in Step 3 and the following general formula (8):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
(In the formula, Y represents a halogen atom or —OC (═O) R 1. R 1 is as defined above, and preferred ones are also the same.)
The esterifying agent represented by the formula [hereinafter referred to as the esterifying agent (8). And the following general formula (Ib):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
(式中、R1~R11、Ar、W及びZは、前記定義の通りである。)
で表される光重合開始剤[以下、光重合開始剤(I-b)と称する。]を得る工程である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
(Wherein R 1 to R 11 , Ar, W and Z are as defined above.)
[Hereinafter referred to as photopolymerization initiator (Ib)]. ] Is a step of obtaining.
 上記式中、Yが示すハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子等が挙げられ、塩素原子が好ましい。
 工程4で使用するエステル化剤(8)の使用量に特に制限は無いが、オキシム体(7b)1モルに対して、好ましくは0.5~2モル、より好ましくは0.8~1.2モルであり、未反応物を低減する観点から、ほぼ等量で反応させることがさらに好ましい。
 工程4は、反応を促進するために、塩基の存在下に実施してもよい。塩基としては、有機塩基や無機塩基が挙げられる。有機塩基としては、例えばトリエチルアミン、トリブチルアミン等のアミン類;ピリジン等の含窒素複素環式芳香族化合物等が挙げられる。無機塩基としては、例えば炭酸ナトリウム等のアルカリ金属炭酸塩;炭酸マグネシウム等のアルカリ土類金属炭酸塩;水酸化ナトリウム等のアルカリ金属水酸化物;水酸化マグネシウム等のアルカリ土類金属水酸化物等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、有機塩基が好ましく、アミン類、含窒素複素環式芳香族化合物がより好ましく、反応効率及び製造コストの観点から、トリエチルアミン、ピリジンがさらに好ましい。
 工程4にて塩基を使用する場合、その使用量は、光重合開始剤(I-b)の収率及び製造コストの観点から、オキシム体(7b)1モルに対して、好ましくは1~5モル、より好ましくは1.5~3モルである。
In the above formula, examples of the halogen atom represented by Y include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom, and a chlorine atom is preferable.
The amount of the esterifying agent (8) used in Step 4 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.5 to 2 mol, more preferably 0.8 to 1. mol based on 1 mol of the oxime (7b). From the viewpoint of reducing unreacted substances, it is more preferable to carry out the reaction in substantially the same amount.
Step 4 may be performed in the presence of a base to promote the reaction. Examples of the base include organic bases and inorganic bases. Examples of the organic base include amines such as triethylamine and tributylamine; nitrogen-containing heterocyclic aromatic compounds such as pyridine. Examples of the inorganic base include alkali metal carbonates such as sodium carbonate; alkaline earth metal carbonates such as magnesium carbonate; alkali metal hydroxides such as sodium hydroxide; alkaline earth metal hydroxides such as magnesium hydroxide Is mentioned. Among these, organic bases are preferable, amines and nitrogen-containing heterocyclic aromatic compounds are more preferable, and triethylamine and pyridine are more preferable from the viewpoint of reaction efficiency and production cost.
When a base is used in Step 4, the amount used is preferably 1 to 5 with respect to 1 mol of the oxime (7b) from the viewpoint of the yield of the photopolymerization initiator (Ib) and the production cost. Mol, more preferably 1.5 to 3 mol.
 工程4は、溶媒の存在下に実施することが好ましい。溶媒としては、t-ブチルメチルエーテル、エチルメチルエーテル、シクロペンチルメチルエーテル、テトラヒドロフラン(THF)等のエーテル類が好ましく挙げられる。
 工程4の反応温度は、反応開始時は-50~5℃(好ましくは-10~5℃)とし、反応が進行するにしたがって、徐々に室温(15~25℃程度)へ戻すことが好ましい。反応時間は、オキシム体(7b)、エステル化剤(8)の種類及び使用量、並びに反応温度によっても異なるが、通常、好ましくは0.5~10時間、より好ましくは1~5時間である。
 工程4の実施形態に特に制限は無く、例えばオキシム体(7b)及びエステル化剤(8)を適宜溶媒中で混合し、そこへ塩基を滴下し、滴下終了後、反応液の温度を徐々に室温へ戻して攪拌を続けることにより、本発明の光重合開始剤(I-b)を得ることができる。
 反応終了後、得られた反応混合液から、抽出等の通常の有機化合物の分離手段によって、光重合開始剤(I-b)を得ることができる。適宜、蒸留、カラムクロマトグラフィー、再結晶等の、通常の有機化合物の精製手段によって精製することにより、光重合開始剤(I-b)の純度を高めることもできる。
Step 4 is preferably performed in the presence of a solvent. Preferred examples of the solvent include ethers such as t-butyl methyl ether, ethyl methyl ether, cyclopentyl methyl ether, and tetrahydrofuran (THF).
The reaction temperature in step 4 is preferably −50 to 5 ° C. (preferably −10 to 5 ° C.) at the start of the reaction, and gradually returned to room temperature (about 15 to 25 ° C.) as the reaction proceeds. The reaction time varies depending on the kind and amount of the oxime (7b) and esterifying agent (8), and the reaction temperature, but is usually preferably 0.5 to 10 hours, more preferably 1 to 5 hours. .
There is no restriction | limiting in particular in embodiment of process 4, For example, an oxime body (7b) and an esterifying agent (8) are mixed in a solvent suitably, a base is dripped there, and the temperature of a reaction liquid is gradually made to drop after completion | finish of dripping. By returning to room temperature and continuing stirring, the photopolymerization initiator (Ib) of the present invention can be obtained.
After completion of the reaction, the photopolymerization initiator (Ib) can be obtained from the resulting reaction mixture by a usual organic compound separation means such as extraction. The purity of the photopolymerization initiator (Ib) can also be increased by appropriately purifying by a usual organic compound purification means such as distillation, column chromatography, recrystallization and the like.
 こうして得られる本発明の光重合開始剤(I-b)は、カルバゾール骨格中の窒素原子に、エステル基又はアミド結合(若しくは環を形成したアミド結合)を含有する特殊な置換基が付いている。そのため、光硬化性組成物中のエチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物(特に(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基を有する化合物)やエーテル結合及び/又はエステル結合を有する25℃で液体の化合物との相溶性が高く、かつ溶剤(前記のエーテル結合及び/又はエステル結合を有する25℃で液体の化合物を含む。)に対する溶解性が高く、光(特に波長450nm以下の短波長の光)に対する感度が高く、解像度及び現像性、ひいては深部硬化性に優れ、さらに基板との密着性が良好になるものと考えられる。また、該光重合開始剤(I-b)は、露光時の光により発生する分解物による重合物の汚染や装置の汚染が無い。
 なお、特定化合物や溶剤に対する光重合開始剤(I-b)の相溶性や溶解性の高さは、感度、解像度及び現像性、ひいては深部硬化性の向上に寄与しているものと考えられ、カラーフィルタ用途においては重要な要素であると言える。特にカラーフィルタ用途においては、光重合開始剤が、エーテル結合及び/又はエステル結合を有する溶剤(特に、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート等)100質量部に対して、5質量部以上溶解することが好ましく、10質量部以上溶解することがさらに好ましく、本発明の光重合開始剤(I-b)はかかる条件を満たしており、カラーフィルタ用光硬化性組成物に含有させる光重合開始剤、さらには高遮光性のブラックマトリックス用光硬化性組成物に含有させる光重合開始剤として適している。
The photopolymerization initiator (Ib) of the present invention thus obtained has a special substituent containing an ester group or an amide bond (or an amide bond forming a ring) on the nitrogen atom in the carbazole skeleton. . Therefore, compatibility with a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond (particularly a compound having a (meth) acryloyloxy group) and a compound having an ether bond and / or an ester bond in a photocurable composition at 25 ° C. High solubility in solvents (including the above-mentioned liquid compounds at 25 ° C. having an ether bond and / or ester bond), high sensitivity to light (especially light having a short wavelength of 450 nm or less), resolution In addition, it is considered that the developability, and hence the deep part curability, is excellent, and the adhesion to the substrate is improved. In addition, the photopolymerization initiator (Ib) is free from contamination of the polymer or apparatus due to decomposition products generated by light during exposure.
Note that the high compatibility and solubility of the photopolymerization initiator (Ib) with respect to a specific compound or solvent is considered to contribute to the improvement of sensitivity, resolution and developability, and thus deep curability. It can be said that this is an important factor in color filter applications. Particularly in color filter applications, the photopolymerization initiator is preferably dissolved in an amount of 5 parts by mass or more with respect to 100 parts by mass of a solvent having an ether bond and / or an ester bond (particularly propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate). More preferably, 10 parts by mass or more is dissolved, and the photopolymerization initiator (Ib) of the present invention satisfies such conditions, and is included in the photocurable composition for color filters, It is suitable as a photopolymerization initiator to be contained in a highly light-shielding photocurable composition for black matrix.
 次に、本発明の光重合開始剤(I)を含有する光硬化性組成物、該光硬化性組成物を用いたカラーフィルタ、パターン形成方法及び液晶表示装置について順に説明する。
[光硬化性組成物]
 本発明の光硬化性組成物は、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物及び/又はバインダー樹脂と、前記光重合開始剤(I)を1種以上含有するものである。本発明の光硬化性組成物には、さらに、色材、そして必要に応じて、前記光重合開始剤(I)以外の光重合開始剤、分散剤、多官能モノマー、単官能モノマー、増感剤及び溶剤等を含有してもよく、こうして得られる光硬化性組成物は、カラーフィルタ用途に有用である。なお、多官能モノマー及び単官能モノマーは、官能基がエチレン性不飽和結合を有していれば、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物にもなり得る。
 本発明の光硬化性組成物において、光重合開始剤(I)の含有量は、感度、解像度及び現像性の観点から、光硬化性組成物の固形分に対して、好ましくは2~50質量%、より好ましくは2~30質量%、さらに好ましくは4~15質量%である。
 また、本発明の光硬化性組成物が、前記光重合開始剤(I)以外の光重合開始剤を含有する場合、前記光重合開始剤(I)以外の光重合開始剤の含有量は、本発明の効果を著しく阻害しない限り特に制限は無いが、光重合開始剤(I)100質量部に対して、好ましくは100質量部以下、より好ましくは50質量部以下、より好ましくは20質量部以下、さらに好ましくは10質量部以下、特に好ましくは5質量部以下である。
Next, a photocurable composition containing the photopolymerization initiator (I) of the present invention, a color filter using the photocurable composition, a pattern forming method, and a liquid crystal display device will be described in order.
[Photocurable composition]
The photocurable composition of the present invention contains at least one compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond and / or binder resin and the photopolymerization initiator (I). The photocurable composition of the present invention further includes a colorant and, if necessary, a photopolymerization initiator other than the photopolymerization initiator (I), a dispersant, a polyfunctional monomer, a monofunctional monomer, and sensitization. An agent and a solvent may be contained, and the photocurable composition thus obtained is useful for color filter applications. In addition, if a functional group has an ethylenically unsaturated bond, a polyfunctional monomer and a monofunctional monomer can also become a compound which has an ethylenically unsaturated bond.
In the photocurable composition of the present invention, the content of the photopolymerization initiator (I) is preferably 2 to 50 mass based on the solid content of the photocurable composition from the viewpoints of sensitivity, resolution and developability. %, More preferably 2 to 30% by mass, still more preferably 4 to 15% by mass.
Moreover, when the photocurable composition of the present invention contains a photopolymerization initiator other than the photopolymerization initiator (I), the content of the photopolymerization initiator other than the photopolymerization initiator (I) is: Although there is no restriction | limiting in particular unless the effect of this invention is inhibited remarkably, Preferably it is 100 mass parts or less with respect to 100 mass parts of photoinitiators (I), More preferably, it is 50 mass parts or less, More preferably, it is 20 mass parts. Hereinafter, it is more preferably 10 parts by mass or less, particularly preferably 5 parts by mass or less.
(エチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物)
 エチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物は、光重合開始剤(I)の存在下に光照射されることにより、重合反応を起こし、光硬化性組成物において、バインダーとなり得る化合物であり、形成された画素中で結着剤としての役割を果たし得る。エチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物は、本発明の光硬化性組成物中に、好ましくは5~60質量%、より好ましくは10~40質量%含有させる。この範囲であると、形成された画素と基板との密着性が良好となる傾向にある。なお、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物は、後述するバインダー樹脂と併用してもよい。併用する場合、その合計含有量が前記範囲内であると好ましい。
 エチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物の具体例としては、(メタ)アクリル酸、クロトン酸、α-クロルアクリル酸等の不飽和モノカルボン酸類;マレイン酸、フマル酸、イタコン酸等の不飽和ジカルボン酸又はその無水物類;トリメリット酸、ピロメリット酸等の3価以上の不飽和多価カルボン酸又はその無水物類;スチレン、α-メチルスチレン、クロロスチレン、メトキシスチレン、ジビニルベンゼン、ビニルトルエン等の芳香族ビニル化合物;メチル(メタ)アクリレート、エチル(メタ)アクリレート、n-プロピル(メタ)アクリレート、イソプロピル(メタ)アクリレート、n-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、s-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、t-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-エチルヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、ラウリル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、フェノキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、メトキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、ポリ(プロピルオキシ)プロピル(メタ)アクリレート、ビニル(メタ)アクリレート、エチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリエチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、プロピレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリプロピレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、アリル(メタ)アクリレート、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート等の、(多価)アルコールをα,β-不飽和カルボン酸でエステル化した化合物;2-アミノエチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-ジメチルアミノエチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-アミノプロピル(メタ)アクリレート、2-ジメチルアミノプロピル(メタ)アクリレート等の不飽和カルボン酸アミノアルキルエステル類;グリシジル(メタ)アクリレート等の不飽和カルボン酸グリシジルエステル類;酢酸ビニル、プロピオン酸ビニル、酪酸ビニル、安息香酸ビニル等のカルボン酸ビニルエステル類;ビニルメチルエーテル、ビニルエチルエーテル、アリルグリシジルエーテル、イソブチルビニルエーテル等の不飽和エーテル類;(メタ)アクリロニトリル、α-クロロアクリロニトリル、シアン化ビニリデン等のシアン化ビニル化合物;(メタ)アクリルアミド、α-クロロアクリルアミド、N-2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリルアミド等の不飽和アミド類;マレイミド、N-フェニルマレイミド、N-シクロヘキシルマレイミド等の不飽和イミド類;1,3-ブタジエン、イソプレン、クロロプレン等の脂肪族共役ジエン類等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、本発明の光重合開始剤(I)との相溶性の観点から、(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基を有する化合物が好ましい。
 エチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物は、1種を単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。
(Compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond)
A compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond is a compound that is capable of becoming a binder in a photocurable composition by causing a polymerization reaction when irradiated with light in the presence of the photopolymerization initiator (I). It can serve as a binder in the pixel. The compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferably contained in the photocurable composition of the present invention in an amount of 5 to 60% by mass, more preferably 10 to 40% by mass. Within this range, the adhesion between the formed pixel and the substrate tends to be good. In addition, you may use together the compound which has an ethylenically unsaturated bond with the binder resin mentioned later. When using together, it is preferable in the total content being in the said range.
Specific examples of the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include unsaturated monocarboxylic acids such as (meth) acrylic acid, crotonic acid and α-chloroacrylic acid; unsaturated dicarboxylic acids such as maleic acid, fumaric acid and itaconic acid Or anhydrides thereof; trivalent or higher unsaturated polycarboxylic acids such as trimellitic acid and pyromellitic acid or anhydrides thereof; styrene, α-methylstyrene, chlorostyrene, methoxystyrene, divinylbenzene, vinyltoluene, etc. Aromatic vinyl compounds of: methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, n-propyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, s-butyl (meth) acrylate, t- Butyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, Uril (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, methoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, poly (propyloxy) propyl (meth) acrylate, vinyl (meth) acrylate, Ethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, propylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, 1,6-hexanediol di (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane tri (meth) ) Compound obtained by esterifying (poly) alcohol with α, β-unsaturated carboxylic acid, such as acrylate, allyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate; Unsaturated carboxylic acid aminoalkyl esters such as minoethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-dimethylaminoethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-aminopropyl (meth) acrylate, 2-dimethylaminopropyl (meth) acrylate; glycidyl (meth) acrylate Unsaturated carboxylic acid glycidyl esters such as vinyl acetate, vinyl propionate, vinyl butyrate, vinyl benzoate, etc .; unsaturated ethers such as vinyl methyl ether, vinyl ethyl ether, allyl glycidyl ether, isobutyl vinyl ether Class: vinyl cyanide compounds such as (meth) acrylonitrile, α-chloroacrylonitrile, vinylidene cyanide; (meth) acrylamide, α-chloroacrylamide, N-2-hydroxyethyl (meth) And unsaturated amides such as acrylamide; unsaturated imides such as maleimide, N-phenylmaleimide and N-cyclohexylmaleimide; and aliphatic conjugated dienes such as 1,3-butadiene, isoprene and chloroprene. Among these, a compound having a (meth) acryloyloxy group is preferable from the viewpoint of compatibility with the photopolymerization initiator (I) of the present invention.
As the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, one type may be used alone, or two or more types may be used in combination.
 なお、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物が、エーテル結合及び/又はエステル結合(好ましくはエーテル結合及びエステル結合)を持つエチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物である場合、本発明の光重合開始剤(I)との相溶性により一層優れるため、本発明の光硬化性組成物において、後述する溶剤の量を低減する又は無溶剤とすることができるため、そのような化合物を用いることも好ましい。エチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物として、エーテル結合及び/又はエステル結合を持つエチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物を少なくとも1種用いる場合、溶剤の量は、光硬化性組成物全量に対して10質量%以下のみでよく、さらには5質量%以下、さらには無溶剤とすることもできる。 When the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond is a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond having an ether bond and / or an ester bond (preferably an ether bond and an ester bond), the photopolymerization initiator ( Since the compatibility with I) is further improved, the amount of the solvent described later in the photocurable composition of the present invention can be reduced or no solvent can be used. Therefore, it is also preferable to use such a compound. When at least one compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond having an ether bond and / or an ester bond is used as the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, the amount of the solvent is 10 mass relative to the total amount of the photocurable composition. % Or less, further 5% by mass or less, and solvent-free.
(バインダー樹脂)
 バインダー樹脂は、形成された画素中で結着剤としての役割を果たすものであり、基板と密着性が良好なものであれば、特に限定されるものではない。このようなバインダー樹脂は、本発明の光硬化性組成物の固形分中に、好ましくは5~60質量%、より好ましくは10~40質量%含有させる。この範囲であると、形成された画素と基板との密着性が良好となる傾向にある。また、バインダー樹脂の重量平均分子量としては、形成された画素と基板との密着性の観点から、好ましくは3,000~100,000、より好ましくは5,000~50,000である。なお、本明細書において、重量平均分子量は、ゲル浸透クロマトグラフィー(GPC)で測定したポリスチレン換算の値である。
 なお、前述の通り、バインダー樹脂は、前記エチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物と併用してもよい。
(Binder resin)
The binder resin plays a role as a binder in the formed pixel and is not particularly limited as long as it has good adhesion to the substrate. Such a binder resin is preferably contained in the solid content of the photocurable composition of the present invention in an amount of 5 to 60% by mass, more preferably 10 to 40% by mass. Within this range, the adhesion between the formed pixel and the substrate tends to be good. The weight average molecular weight of the binder resin is preferably 3,000 to 100,000, more preferably 5,000 to 50,000, from the viewpoint of adhesion between the formed pixel and the substrate. In the present specification, the weight average molecular weight is a value in terms of polystyrene measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC).
As described above, the binder resin may be used in combination with the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond.
 上記バインダー樹脂としては、一般的なカラーフィルタ用光硬化性組成物に用いられるバインダー樹脂と同様のものを用いることができる。具体的には、エチレン-酢酸ビニル共重合体、エチレン-塩化ビニル共重合体、ポリスチレン、アクリロニトリル-スチレン共重合体、ABS樹脂、ポリメタクリル酸樹脂、エチレンメタクリル酸樹脂、ポリ塩化ビニル樹脂、塩素化塩化ビニル、ポリビニルアルコール、ポリエチレンテレフタレート、ポリブチレンテレフタレート、ポリカーボネート、ポリビニルアセタール、ポリエーテルエーテルケトン、ポリエーテルサルフォン、ポリフェニレンサルファイド、ポリアリレート、ポリビニルブチラール、エポキシ樹脂、フェノキシ樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリアミドイミド樹脂、ポリアミック酸樹脂、ポリエーテルイミド樹脂、フェノール樹脂、ユリア樹脂等が挙げられる。さらに、重合可能なモノマーであるメチル(メタ)アクリレート、エチル(メタ)アクリレート、n-プロピル(メタ)アクリレート、イソプロピル(メタ)アクリレート、s-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、イソブチル(メタ)アクリレート、t-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、n-ペンチル(メタ)アクリレート、n-ヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、2-エチルヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、n-オクチル(メタ)アクリレート、n-デシル(メタ)アクリレート、スチレン、α-メチルスチレン、N-ビニル-2-ピロリドン、グリシジル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、ジシクロペンタニル(メタ)アクリレート、ジシクロペンタニルオキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、フェニル(メタ)アクリレート、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレートの1種以上と、アクリル酸、メタクリル酸、アクリル酸の2量体(例えば、東亜合成化学(株)製、商品名「M-5600」)、イタコン酸、クロトン酸、マレイン酸、フマル酸、ビニル酢酸、これらの酸無水物等の1種以上とを反応させて得られるポリマー又はコポリマー等が挙げられる。また、該コポリマーにグリシジル基又は水酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物を付加させたポリマー等も挙げられる。 As the binder resin, the same binder resin as that used in a general photocurable composition for a color filter can be used. Specifically, ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer, ethylene-vinyl chloride copolymer, polystyrene, acrylonitrile-styrene copolymer, ABS resin, polymethacrylic acid resin, ethylene methacrylic acid resin, polyvinyl chloride resin, chlorination Vinyl chloride, polyvinyl alcohol, polyethylene terephthalate, polybutylene terephthalate, polycarbonate, polyvinyl acetal, polyether ether ketone, polyether sulfone, polyphenylene sulfide, polyarylate, polyvinyl butyral, epoxy resin, phenoxy resin, polyimide resin, polyamideimide resin, Examples thereof include polyamic acid resins, polyetherimide resins, phenol resins, urea resins and the like. Further, polymerizable monomers such as methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, n-propyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, s-butyl (meth) acrylate, isobutyl (meth) acrylate, t- Butyl (meth) acrylate, n-pentyl (meth) acrylate, n-hexyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, n-octyl (meth) acrylate, n-decyl (meth) acrylate, styrene, α- Methyl styrene, N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone, glycidyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, dicyclopentanyloxyethyl (meth) acrylate, phenyl (meth) acrylic And dimers of acrylic acid, methacrylic acid and acrylic acid (for example, trade name “M-5600” manufactured by Toa Synthetic Chemical Co., Ltd.), itaconic acid, croton Examples thereof include polymers or copolymers obtained by reacting at least one of acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, vinyl acetic acid, and acid anhydrides thereof. Moreover, the polymer etc. which added the ethylenically unsaturated compound which has a glycidyl group or a hydroxyl group to this copolymer are mentioned.
 特に好ましいバインダー樹脂としては、カルボキシル基等の酸性官能基を有するアルカリ可溶性樹脂、例えば、アルカリ可溶性アクリル系樹脂を挙げることができる。カルボキシル基を有するアルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、カルボキシル基含有不飽和単量体と他の共重合可能なエチレン性不飽和単量体の共重合体が好ましく、さらに分子内にエポキシ基とエチレン性不飽和基とを併せ持つ化合物、例えばグリシジル(メタ)アクリレート等を付加させ、側鎖にエチレン性不飽和基を導入したものが好ましい。
 上記カルボキシル基含有不飽和単量体としては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸、クロトン酸、マレイン酸、無水マレイン酸、コハク酸モノ[2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシエチル]、フタル酸モノ[2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシエチル]、ω-カルボキシポリカプロラクトンモノ(メタ)アクリレート等が好ましく、(メタ)アクリル酸が特に好ましい。なお、カルボキシル基含有不飽和単量体は、1種を単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 上記エチレン性不飽和単量体としては、メチル(メタ)アクリレート、n-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、イソボルニル(メタ)アクリレート、ジシクロペンタニル(メタ)アクリレート、アリル(メタ)アクリレート、スチレン、α-メチルスチレン、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート、ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-ジメチルアミノエチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-エチルヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、2-ヒドロキシル(メタ)エチルアクリレート、ジシクロペンテニル(メタ)アクリレート等、及びこれらのマクロモノマー類;N-メチルマレイミド、N-シクロヘキシルマレイミド、N-ベンジルマレイミド、N-フェニルマレイミド、N-メチルフェニルマレイミド等のN置換マレイミド類等を挙げることができる。なお、エチレン性不飽和単量体は、1種を単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。
Particularly preferable binder resins include alkali-soluble resins having an acidic functional group such as a carboxyl group, such as alkali-soluble acrylic resins. As the alkali-soluble resin having a carboxyl group, a copolymer of a carboxyl group-containing unsaturated monomer and another copolymerizable ethylenically unsaturated monomer is preferable, and an epoxy group and an ethylenically unsaturated group are further included in the molecule. A compound having a group and a group such as glycidyl (meth) acrylate added thereto and an ethylenically unsaturated group introduced into the side chain is preferred.
Examples of the carboxyl group-containing unsaturated monomer include (meth) acrylic acid, crotonic acid, maleic acid, maleic anhydride, succinic acid mono [2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl], and phthalic acid mono [2]. -(Meth) acryloyloxyethyl], ω-carboxypolycaprolactone mono (meth) acrylate and the like are preferable, and (meth) acrylic acid is particularly preferable. In addition, a carboxyl group-containing unsaturated monomer may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together.
Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated monomer include methyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, and allyl (meth). Acrylate, styrene, α-methylstyrene, benzyl (meth) acrylate, hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-dimethylaminoethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxyl (meth) ethyl acrylate, di Cyclopentenyl (meth) acrylate and the like, and macromonomers thereof; N-methylmaleimide, N-cyclohexylmaleimide, N-benzylmaleimide, N-phenylmaleimide, N-methylphenylmaleimide, etc. Substituted maleimide, and the like can be mentioned. In addition, an ethylenically unsaturated monomer may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together.
(色材)
 本発明の光硬化性組成物には、さらに色材を含有させて着色光硬化性組成物としてもよい。該色材としては、顔料、染料、天然色素等が挙げられる。色材は、1種を単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。色材は、色再現性、硬化性及び現像性の観点から、本発明の光硬化性組成物の固形分中に、好ましくは5~60質量%、より好ましくは5~50質量%含有させる。
 顔料としては、有機顔料、無機顔料があるが、発色性及び耐熱性の観点から有機顔料が好ましい。有機顔料としては、例えばカラーインデックス(C.I.;The Society of Dyers and Colourists 発行)においてピグメント(Pigment)に分類されている化合物(C.I.ピグメントブルー、C.I.ピグメントバイオレット、C.I.ピグメントグリーン、C.I.ピグメントレッド、C.I.ピグメントイエロー、C.I.ピグメントオレンジ等)を挙げることができる。
 なお、色材は、以下の分散剤によって、より均一に分散されていることが好ましい。
(Coloring material)
The photocurable composition of the present invention may further contain a coloring material to form a colored photocurable composition. Examples of the coloring material include pigments, dyes, and natural pigments. A color material may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together. From the viewpoint of color reproducibility, curability and developability, the color material is preferably contained in the solid content of the photocurable composition of the present invention in an amount of 5 to 60% by mass, more preferably 5 to 50% by mass.
Examples of the pigment include organic pigments and inorganic pigments, and organic pigments are preferable from the viewpoint of color developability and heat resistance. Examples of the organic pigment include compounds classified as Pigment (CI Pigment Blue, CI Pigment Violet, C.I .; issued by The Society of Dyers and Colorists). CI pigment green, CI pigment red, CI pigment yellow, CI pigment orange, and the like.
The color material is preferably more uniformly dispersed by the following dispersant.
(分散剤)
 分散剤としては、上記色材を均一に分散することができるものであればよく、公知の分散剤を使用することができる。具体的には、変性ポリウレタン、変性ポリアクリレート、変性ポリエステル、変性ポリアミド等の高分子分散剤、リン酸エステル、アルキルアミン、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルフェニルエーテル等の界面活性剤や顔料誘導体を挙げることができる。これらの中でも、高分子分散剤が好ましく、具体的な市販品の商品名としては、EFKA-4046、EFKA-4047、EFKAポリマー10、EFKAポリマー400、EFKAポリマー401、EFKAポリマー4300、EFKAポリマー4330(以上、チバ・スペシャルティ・ケミカルズ(株)製)、Disperbyk111、Disperbyk161、Disperbyk165、Disperbyk167、Disperbyk182、Disperbyk2000、Disperbyk2001(以上、ビックケミー・ジャパン(株)製)、SOLSPERSE24000、SOLSPERSE27000、SOLSPERSE28000(以上、ルーブリゾール社製)、アジスパー(登録商標)PB821、PB822(味の素ファインテクノ(株)製)等が挙げられる。
(Dispersant)
Any dispersant can be used as long as it can uniformly disperse the colorant, and a known dispersant can be used. Specific examples include polymer dispersants such as modified polyurethane, modified polyacrylate, modified polyester, and modified polyamide, and surfactants and pigment derivatives such as phosphate esters, alkylamines, and polyoxyethylene alkylphenyl ethers. . Among these, polymer dispersants are preferable, and specific commercial product names include EFKA-4046, EFKA-4047, EFKA polymer 10, EFKA polymer 400, EFKA polymer 401, EFKA polymer 4300, and EFKA polymer 4330 ( As described above, manufactured by Ciba Specialty Chemicals Co., Ltd., Disperbyk111, Disperbyk161, Disperbyk165, Disperbyk167, Disperbyk182, Disperbyk2000, Disperbyk2001, ER made by ER ), Addisper (registered trademark) PB821, PB 22 (manufactured by Ajinomoto Fine-Techno Co., Ltd.), and the like.
 本発明の光硬化性組成物に分散剤を含有させる場合、その含有量としては、上述の色材を均一に分散することができるものであれば特に限定されるものではないが、色材の分散性、光硬化性組成物の現像性、及び未露光箇所での現像残渣の低減の観点から、光硬化性組成物の固形分全量に対して、好ましくは0.5~30質量%、より好ましくは1~20質量%である。
 なお、色材(特に顔料)と分散剤は、色材の分散量及び分散性の観点から、後述の溶剤中で混合することにより、分散液としてから使用するのが好ましい。
When the dispersing agent is contained in the photocurable composition of the present invention, the content is not particularly limited as long as the above-described coloring material can be uniformly dispersed. From the viewpoint of dispersibility, developability of the photocurable composition, and reduction of development residue at unexposed locations, preferably 0.5 to 30% by mass relative to the total solid content of the photocurable composition. The content is preferably 1 to 20% by mass.
In addition, it is preferable to use a coloring material (especially pigment) and a dispersing agent by mixing in a below-mentioned solvent from a viewpoint of the dispersion amount and dispersibility of a coloring material, and using it as a dispersion liquid.
(多官能モノマー)
 本発明の光硬化性組成物に適宜含有させてもよい多官能モノマーとしては、上記バインダー樹脂と相溶性のある(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基を有するモノマー、具体的には二官能(メタ)アクリレート及び三官能以上の(メタ)アクリレート等が好ましく挙げられる。多官能モノマーは1種を単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 二官能(メタ)アクリレートとしては、例えば、1,4-ブタンジオール(メタ)アクリレート、ネオペンチルグリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,6-へキサンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリプロピレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、トリエチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリエチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ビスフェノールAジ(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられる。
 また、三官能以上の(メタ)アクリレートとしては、例えば、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールエタントリ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート(DPHA)、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレートや、カルボン酸変性ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート等のカルボキシル基含有多官能(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。
(Polyfunctional monomer)
As the polyfunctional monomer that may be appropriately contained in the photocurable composition of the present invention, a monomer having a (meth) acryloyloxy group compatible with the binder resin, specifically, a bifunctional (meth) acrylate and Trifunctional or higher functional (meth) acrylates are preferred. A polyfunctional monomer may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together.
Examples of the bifunctional (meth) acrylate include 1,4-butanediol (meth) acrylate, neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate, 1,6-hexanediol di (meth) acrylate, and polypropylene glycol di (meth) Examples include acrylate, triethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, and bisphenol A di (meth) acrylate.
Examples of the trifunctional or higher functional (meth) acrylate include trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, trimethylolethane tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, Carboxyl group-containing polyfunctional (meta ) Acrylates.
 本発明の光硬化性組成物に多官能モノマーを含有させる場合、その含有量は、光硬化性組成物の固形分全量に対して、好ましくは3~50質量%である。この範囲であれば、充分に光硬化が進行するため、アルカリ現像時に露光部分が溶出する恐れがなくなり、且つアルカリ現像性が良好である。 When the polyfunctional monomer is contained in the photocurable composition of the present invention, the content thereof is preferably 3 to 50% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photocurable composition. If it is in this range, photocuring sufficiently proceeds, so that there is no possibility that the exposed portion is eluted during alkali development, and the alkali developability is good.
(単官能モノマー)
 本発明の光硬化性組成物に適宜含有させてもよい単官能モノマーとしては(メタ)アクリレート類が好ましく、例えば、アリル(メタ)アクリレート、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート、ブトキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、ブトキシエチレングリコール(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、ジシクロペンタニル(メタ)アクリレート、2-エチルヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、グリセロール(メタ)アクリレート、グリシジル(メタ)アクリレート、2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-ヒドロキシプロピル(メタ)アクリレート、イソボニル(メタ)アクリレート、イソデキシル(メタ)アクリレート、イソオクチル(メタ)アクリレート、ラウリル(メタ)アクリレート、2-メトキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、メトキシエチレングリコール(メタ)アクリレート、フェノキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、ステアリル(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられる。
(Monofunctional monomer)
Monofunctional monomers that may be appropriately contained in the photocurable composition of the present invention are preferably (meth) acrylates, such as allyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, butoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, butoxy Ethylene glycol (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, glycerol (meth) acrylate, glycidyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, isodexyl (meth) acrylate, isooctyl (meth) acrylate, lauryl (meth) acrylate, 2-methoxyethyl Meth) acrylate, methoxy ethylene glycol (meth) acrylate, phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, stearyl (meth) acrylate.
(増感剤)
 さらに、本発明の光硬化性組成物には、必要に応じて増感剤を含有させてもよい。増感剤は、本発明の光硬化性組成物を基板上に塗布した後、露光した際に、照射されたエネルギーを吸収し、その吸収したエネルギーを上記本発明の光重合開始剤の反応開始に寄与させる役割を担う物質である。
 増感剤としては、具体的には、4,4'-ビス(ジエチルアミノ)ベンゾフェノン、4,4'-ビス(ジメチルアミノ)ベンゾフェノン、4-メチル-4'-ジエチルアミノベンゾフェノン、4-メトキシ-4'-ジエチルアミノベンゾフェノン、4,4'-ビス(ジプロピルアミノ)ベンゾフェノン、4,4'-ビス(ジイソプロピルアミノ)ベンゾフェノン等が挙げられる。これらは、1種を単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 本発明の光硬化性組成物に増感剤を含有させる場合、その含有量としては、光硬化性組成物の固形分全量に対して、好ましくは1~10質量%である。
(Sensitizer)
Furthermore, you may make the photocurable composition of this invention contain a sensitizer as needed. The sensitizer absorbs the irradiated energy when it is exposed after the photocurable composition of the present invention is applied on the substrate, and the absorbed energy is used to initiate the reaction of the photopolymerization initiator of the present invention. It is a substance that plays a role of contributing to
Specific examples of the sensitizer include 4,4′-bis (diethylamino) benzophenone, 4,4′-bis (dimethylamino) benzophenone, 4-methyl-4′-diethylaminobenzophenone, 4-methoxy-4 ′. -Diethylaminobenzophenone, 4,4'-bis (dipropylamino) benzophenone, 4,4'-bis (diisopropylamino) benzophenone and the like. These may be used individually by 1 type and may use 2 or more types together.
When the photocurable composition of the present invention contains a sensitizer, the content thereof is preferably 1 to 10% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photocurable composition.
(溶剤)
 本発明の光硬化性組成物には、色材を分散させるために溶剤を含有していてもよい。該溶剤としては、一般的なカラーフィルタ用光硬化性組成物に用いられるものであれば特に限定されるものではない。具体的には、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールジエチルエーテル、ジプロピレングリコールジメチルエーテル等の(モノ又はポリ)アルキレングリコール(モノ又はポリ)アルキルエーテル類、及びこれらのアセテート類;プロピレングリコールジアセテート、1,3-ブチレングリコールジアセテート等のジアセテート類;テトラヒドロフラン等のエーテル類;メチルエチルケトン、シクロヘキサノン、2-ヘプタノン等のケトン類;2-ヒドロキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-ヒドロキシプロピオン酸エチル、酢酸エチル、n-ブチルアセテート、イソブチルアセテート、酪酸イソブチル、酪酸n-ブチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸エチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、3-メトキシブチルアセテート、乳酸エチル、シクロヘキサノールアセテート等のエステル類;トルエン、キシレン等の芳香族炭化水素類等を挙げることができる。溶剤は、1種を単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。
(solvent)
The photocurable composition of the present invention may contain a solvent in order to disperse the coloring material. The solvent is not particularly limited as long as it is used for a general photocurable composition for a color filter. Specifically, (mono or poly) alkylene glycol (mono or poly) such as ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, diethylene glycol diethyl ether, and dipropylene glycol dimethyl ether. ) Alkyl ethers and their acetates; diacetates such as propylene glycol diacetate and 1,3-butylene glycol diacetate; ethers such as tetrahydrofuran; ketones such as methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone and 2-heptanone; Methyl hydroxypropionate, ethyl 3-hydroxypropionate, ethyl acetate, n-butyl Esters such as cetate, isobutyl acetate, isobutyl butyrate, n-butyl butyrate, ethyl 3-methoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, 3-methoxybutyl acetate, ethyl lactate, cyclohexanol acetate; aromatics such as toluene and xylene Group hydrocarbons and the like. A solvent may be used individually by 1 type and may use 2 or more types together.
 これらの中でも、相溶性、溶解性、顔料分散性及び塗布性の観点からは、エーテル結合及び/又はエステル結合を有する25℃で液体の化合物、具体的にはプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、3-メトキシブチルアセテート、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールジエチルエーテルが好ましく、エーテル結合及びエステル結合を有する25℃で液体の化合物がより好ましい。
 本発明の光硬化性組成物に溶剤を含有させる場合、その含有量としては、光硬化性組成物全量中、好ましくは50~90質量%である。通常、この範囲であれば、顔料分散性が良好であり、レジスト塗布特性(面内均一性)を良好なものとすることができる。なお、本発明の光重合開始剤は、エーテル結合及び/又はエステル結合を有する25℃で液体の化合物との相溶性に優れているため、上記溶剤がエーテル結合及び/又はエステル結合を有する25℃で液体の化合物であれば、光硬化性組成物における溶剤の含有量を大幅に低減することもできる。その場合、本発明の光硬化性組成物中におけるエーテル結合及び/又はエステル結合を有する25℃で液体の化合物の含有量は、光重合開始剤(I)1質量部に対して好ましくは5~100質量部の範囲で任意に選択し得るため、必要に応じて、光重合開始剤(I)1質量部に対して5~20質量部程度、さらには5~10質量部程度の少ない量とすることも可能である。
Among these, from the viewpoint of compatibility, solubility, pigment dispersibility, and coatability, a compound that has an ether bond and / or an ester bond and is liquid at 25 ° C., specifically, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, 3-methoxy Butyl acetate, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, and diethylene glycol diethyl ether are preferable, and a liquid compound having an ether bond and an ester bond at 25 ° C. is more preferable.
When the photocurable composition of the present invention contains a solvent, the content thereof is preferably 50 to 90% by mass in the total amount of the photocurable composition. Usually, within this range, the pigment dispersibility is good and the resist coating characteristics (in-plane uniformity) can be made good. In addition, since the photopolymerization initiator of the present invention is excellent in compatibility with a liquid compound at 25 ° C. having an ether bond and / or an ester bond, the solvent has an ether bond and / or an ester bond at 25 ° C. If it is a liquid compound, the content of the solvent in the photocurable composition can be greatly reduced. In that case, the content of the compound having an ether bond and / or an ester bond and having a liquid at 25 ° C. in the photocurable composition of the present invention is preferably 5 to 1 part by weight with respect to 1 part by weight of the photopolymerization initiator (I). Since it can be arbitrarily selected in the range of 100 parts by mass, if necessary, the amount is as small as about 5 to 20 parts by mass, more preferably about 5 to 10 parts by mass with respect to 1 part by mass of the photopolymerization initiator (I). It is also possible to do.
(その他の成分)
 本発明の光硬化性組成物には、さらに必要に応じて、無機充填剤;密着促進剤;凝集防止剤;重合停止剤;連鎖移動剤;レベリング剤;可塑剤;消泡剤;シランカップリング剤;紫外線吸収剤等を含有させてもよい。
(Other ingredients)
The photocurable composition of the present invention further contains an inorganic filler, an adhesion promoter, an aggregation inhibitor, a polymerization terminator, a chain transfer agent, a leveling agent, a plasticizer, an antifoaming agent, and a silane coupling, if necessary. Agent: You may contain a ultraviolet absorber etc.
[カラーフィルタ]
 カラーフィルタの製造方法には、色材を含有する本発明の光硬化性組成物を用い、フォトリソグラフィー法により、孔部を有する着色層(パターン)を形成する方法を利用することが好ましい。この方法であれば、例えば上記露光の際に、エネルギーの回折等が生じた場合であっても、その影響を受けにくいものとすることができる。従って、着色層に微細なパターン状に孔部が形成された、高精細なカラーフィルタとすることが可能となる。
[Color filter]
As a method for producing a color filter, it is preferable to use a method of forming a colored layer (pattern) having pores by photolithography using the photocurable composition of the present invention containing a colorant. With this method, for example, even when energy diffraction or the like occurs during the exposure, it is difficult to be affected by the influence. Therefore, it is possible to obtain a high-definition color filter in which holes are formed in a fine pattern in the colored layer.
(パターン形成方法)
 パターン形成方法として、本発明の光硬化性組成物を用いて、フォトリソグラフィー法により行う方法を説明する。その方法については、着色層に孔部を形成することが可能な方法であれば特に限定されるものではない。例えば、本発明の光硬化性組成物を基板に塗布し、乾燥した後、開口部と遮蔽部とが設けられたフォトマスク等を用いて、エネルギーを照射することにより露光し、次いで現像を行うことによりパターンを形成する。なお、これを複数回繰り返すことにより、例えば赤色、緑色、青色それぞれのパターンを基板上に形成し、次いで、酸化インジウムスズ(ITO)等の透明電極膜を形成することにより、カラーフィルタを製造することができる。
 前記光硬化性組成物の塗布方法に特に制限はなく、例えばスピンコート法やスプレーコート、ディップコート、ロールコート、ビードコート、バーコート等の公知の塗布方法に利用できる。塗布後の乾燥は、通常、好ましくは50~150℃で15秒~10分行う。
 露光の際に用いられる光源としては、一般的に着色層の形成の際に用いられている光源と同様とすることができるが、超高圧水銀ランプ、低圧水銀ランプ、メタルハライドランプ等、紫外部に高輝線を有するランプが好ましい。これにより、上記光硬化性組成物の特性をより効果的に発揮させることが可能となる。
 また、前記光硬化性組成物を現像する方法としては、不要部分の光硬化性組成物を除去することが可能であれば、その方法等は特に限定されるものではなく、一般的なカラーフィルタの製造の際に行われる現像方法と同様とすることができる。ここで、例えば、現像液の種類、現像液の濃度、現像液や洗浄水の圧力等を最適化することにより、より微細なパターン状に孔部を形成することが可能となる。
(Pattern formation method)
As a pattern forming method, a method performed by a photolithography method using the photocurable composition of the present invention will be described. About the method, if it is a method which can form a hole in a colored layer, it will not specifically limit. For example, after applying the photocurable composition of the present invention to a substrate and drying it, exposure is performed by irradiating energy using a photomask or the like provided with an opening and a shielding part, and then development is performed. Thus, a pattern is formed. By repeating this a plurality of times, for example, red, green, and blue patterns are formed on the substrate, and then a transparent electrode film such as indium tin oxide (ITO) is formed to manufacture a color filter. be able to.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular in the coating method of the said photocurable composition, For example, it can utilize for well-known coating methods, such as a spin coat method, spray coat, dip coat, roll coat, bead coat, bar coat. Drying after coating is usually preferably performed at 50 to 150 ° C. for 15 seconds to 10 minutes.
The light source used for the exposure can be the same as the light source generally used for the formation of the colored layer, but in the ultraviolet region such as an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp, a low pressure mercury lamp, a metal halide lamp, Lamps with high emission lines are preferred. Thereby, it becomes possible to exhibit the characteristic of the said photocurable composition more effectively.
Further, the method for developing the photocurable composition is not particularly limited as long as the unnecessary portion of the photocurable composition can be removed. It can be made to be the same as the developing method performed at the time of manufacture. Here, for example, by optimizing the type of the developing solution, the concentration of the developing solution, the pressure of the developing solution or the washing water, and the like, the hole can be formed in a finer pattern.
 なお、本工程に用いられる基板としては、一般的なカラーフィルタに用いられる基板(透明基板)と同様のものを用いることができる。具体的には、石英ガラス、無アルカリガラス、合成石英板等の可撓性のない透明なリジッド材、あるいは、透明樹脂フィルム、光学用樹脂板等の可撓性を有する透明なフレキシブル材が挙げられる。
 基板の厚みは、特に限定されるものではないが、本発明のカラーフィルタの用途に応じて、例えば100μm~1mm程度のものを使用することができる。
 カラーフィルタの製造においては、例えば、遮光部を形成する遮光部形成工程、上記着色層上にオーバーコート層を形成する工程等、必要に応じて適宜、他の工程を有していてもよい。
In addition, as a board | substrate used for this process, the thing similar to the board | substrate (transparent substrate) used for a general color filter can be used. Specific examples include inflexible transparent rigid materials such as quartz glass, alkali-free glass, and synthetic quartz plates, or transparent flexible materials having flexibility such as transparent resin films and optical resin plates. It is done.
The thickness of the substrate is not particularly limited, but a substrate having a thickness of, for example, about 100 μm to 1 mm can be used depending on the use of the color filter of the present invention.
In the production of the color filter, for example, other steps may be appropriately included as necessary, such as a light shielding portion forming step for forming a light shielding portion and a step for forming an overcoat layer on the colored layer.
[液晶表示装置]
 本発明の液晶表示装置は、前記した本発明のカラーフィルタと対向基板と、前記カラーフィルタと前記対向基板との間に形成された液晶層とを有するものであり、その構成は特に制限されるものではなく、公知のカラーフィルタが用いられた液晶表示装置と同じ構成をとることができる。
 例えば、図1に示すように、本発明の液晶表示装置40は、得られたカラーフィルタ10(表示側基板)と、TFTアレイ基板(液晶駆動側基板)を有する対向基板20を対向させ、両基板の内面側周縁部をシール剤により接合すると、両基板は所定距離のセルギャップを保持した状態で貼り合わされる。そして、基板間の間隙部に液晶を満たして密封し、液晶層30とすることにより、液晶パネルに属するアクティブマトリックス方式のカラー液晶表示装置が得られる。なお、ここで、本発明のカラーフィルタ10は透明基板1、遮光部2及び着色層3を有する。
 液晶表示装置の駆動方式に特に制限はなく、一般的に液晶表示装置に用いられている駆動方式を採用することができる。例えば、TN方式、IPS方式、OCB方式及びMVA方式等が挙げられる。また、液晶層を構成する液晶としては、液晶表示装置の駆動方式等に応じて、誘電異方性の異なる各種液晶及びこれらの混合物を用いることができる。
[Liquid Crystal Display]
The liquid crystal display device of the present invention includes the above-described color filter of the present invention, a counter substrate, and a liquid crystal layer formed between the color filter and the counter substrate, and the configuration thereof is particularly limited. Instead, it can have the same configuration as a liquid crystal display device using a known color filter.
For example, as shown in FIG. 1, the liquid crystal display device 40 of the present invention has the obtained color filter 10 (display side substrate) and a counter substrate 20 having a TFT array substrate (liquid crystal drive side substrate) facing each other. When the inner peripheral edge of the substrate is joined with a sealant, the two substrates are bonded together while maintaining a cell gap of a predetermined distance. An active matrix color liquid crystal display device belonging to the liquid crystal panel can be obtained by filling the liquid crystal layer 30 with the liquid crystal in the gap between the substrates and sealing it. Here, the color filter 10 of the present invention has a transparent substrate 1, a light shielding part 2, and a colored layer 3.
There is no particular limitation on the driving method of the liquid crystal display device, and a driving method generally used for a liquid crystal display device can be adopted. For example, a TN method, an IPS method, an OCB method, an MVA method, and the like can be given. As the liquid crystal constituting the liquid crystal layer, various liquid crystals having different dielectric anisotropies and mixtures thereof can be used depending on the driving method of the liquid crystal display device.
 次に、本発明を実施例により、さらに詳細に説明するが、本発明は、これらの例によって何ら限定されるものではない。 Next, the present invention will be described in more detail with reference to examples, but the present invention is not limited to these examples.
<実施例1>
(工程1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
 カルバゾール6.8g(40mmol)とエチルアクリレート4.0g(40mmol)及び炭酸カリウム5.5g(40mmol)をジメチルホルムアミド(DMF)に懸濁させ、室温で24時間攪拌した。反応終了後、水を添加してからさらに30分攪拌し、その後、酢酸エチルで抽出、水で洗浄し、硫酸マグネシウムで乾燥させ、溶媒を留去、乾燥することにより、淡黄色液体の上記化合物(i)9.6g(収率93%)を得た。該化合物(i)の1H-NMR測定結果を以下に示す。
<Example 1>
(Process 1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
Carbazole (6.8 g, 40 mmol), ethyl acrylate (4.0 g, 40 mmol) and potassium carbonate (5.5 g, 40 mmol) were suspended in dimethylformamide (DMF) and stirred at room temperature for 24 hours. After completion of the reaction, water was added and the mixture was further stirred for 30 minutes, and then extracted with ethyl acetate, washed with water, dried over magnesium sulfate, the solvent was distilled off and dried, whereby the above compound as a pale yellow liquid was obtained. (I) 9.6 g (93% yield) was obtained. The 1 H-NMR measurement results of the compound (i) are shown below.
 1H-NMR(400MHz,CDCl3,TMS,ppm)δ:1.15(t,3H)、2.835(t,2H)、4.08(q,2H)、4.64(t,3H)、7.215-7.254(m,2H)、7.45-7.47(m,4H)、8.08(d,2H) 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 , TMS, ppm) δ: 1.15 (t, 3H), 2.835 (t, 2H), 4.08 (q, 2H), 4.64 (t, 3H) ), 7.215-7.254 (m, 2H), 7.45-7.47 (m, 4H), 8.08 (d, 2H)
(工程2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
 化合物(i)2.7g(10mmol)をジクロロメタン10mlに溶解させ、氷浴で冷却しながら塩化アルミニウム2.7g(20mmol)を20分かけて添加した。得られた混合溶液へベンゾイルクロリド1.4g(11mmol)を20分かけて滴下した。その後、徐々に室温に戻してから、1時間攪拌した。再び氷浴で冷却しながら、塩化アルミニウム2.7g(20mmol)を20分かけて添加し、そこへアセチルクロリド1.2g(15mmol)を20分かけて滴下した。その後、徐々に室温に戻し一晩攪拌した。反応終了後、氷水に反応溶液を投入し、酢酸エチルで抽出した後、水、飽和炭酸水素ナトリウム水溶液及び飽和食塩水で洗浄し、硫酸マグネシウムで乾燥してから溶媒を留去した。
 シリカゲルカラムクロマトグラフィー(溶出液;ジクロロメタン→ノルマルヘキサン:酢酸エチル=2:1)により生成物を単離し、淡黄色固体の化合物(ii)2.8g(収率70%)を得た。該化合物(ii)の1H-NMR測定結果を以下に示す。
(Process 2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
2.7 g (10 mmol) of compound (i) was dissolved in 10 ml of dichloromethane, and 2.7 g (20 mmol) of aluminum chloride was added over 20 minutes while cooling with an ice bath. To the obtained mixed solution, 1.4 g (11 mmol) of benzoyl chloride was added dropwise over 20 minutes. Thereafter, the mixture was gradually returned to room temperature and stirred for 1 hour. While cooling in an ice bath again, 2.7 g (20 mmol) of aluminum chloride was added over 20 minutes, and 1.2 g (15 mmol) of acetyl chloride was added dropwise thereto over 20 minutes. Thereafter, the mixture was gradually returned to room temperature and stirred overnight. After completion of the reaction, the reaction solution was poured into ice water, extracted with ethyl acetate, washed with water, saturated aqueous sodium hydrogen carbonate solution and saturated brine, dried over magnesium sulfate, and then the solvent was distilled off.
The product was isolated by silica gel column chromatography (eluent: dichloromethane → normal hexane: ethyl acetate = 2: 1) to obtain 2.8 g of light yellow solid compound (ii) (yield 70%). The results of 1 H-NMR measurement of the compound (ii) are shown below.
 1H-NMR(400MHz,CDCl3,TMS,ppm)δ:1.16(t,3H)、2.725(s,3H)、2.91(t,2H)、4.08(q,2H)、4.73(t,2H)、7.525-7.86(m,5H)、8.10(dd,2H)、8.18(dd,1H)、8.20(dd,1H)、8.625(d,1H)、8.725(d,1H) 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 , TMS, ppm) δ: 1.16 (t, 3H), 2.725 (s, 3H), 2.91 (t, 2H), 4.08 (q, 2H) ), 4.73 (t, 2H), 7.525-7.86 (m, 5H), 8.10 (dd, 2H), 8.18 (dd, 1H), 8.20 (dd, 1H) 8.625 (d, 1H), 8.725 (d, 1H)
(工程3)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
 塩化ヒドロキシルアミン0.12g(1.7mmol)及び酢酸ナトリウム0.17g(2.0mmol)を水1.4mlに溶解させ、そこへ化合物(ii)0.60g(1.58mmol)及びエタノール11mlを添加し、7時間還流させた。
 反応終了後、反応溶液の溶媒を留去し、得られた固体を水で洗浄した後、THFに溶解させ、硫酸マグネシウムで乾燥し、溶媒を留去することにより、淡黄色液体の化合物(iii)0.60g(収率89%)を得た。該化合物(iii)の1H-NMR測定結果を以下に示す。
(Process 3)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
0.12 g (1.7 mmol) of hydroxylamine chloride and 0.17 g (2.0 mmol) of sodium acetate were dissolved in 1.4 ml of water, and 0.60 g (1.58 mmol) of compound (ii) and 11 ml of ethanol were added thereto. And refluxed for 7 hours.
After completion of the reaction, the solvent of the reaction solution was distilled off, and the resulting solid was washed with water, dissolved in THF, dried over magnesium sulfate, and the solvent was distilled off to give a pale yellow liquid compound (iii ) 0.60 g (89% yield) was obtained. The 1 H-NMR measurement results of the compound (iii) are shown below.
 1H-NMR(400MHz,CDCl3,TMS,ppm)δ:1.16(t,3H)、2.41(s,3H)、2.89(t,2H)、4.09(q,2H)、4.69(t,2H)、7.475-7.63(m,5H)、7.85(dd,1H)、8.045(dd,2H)、8.07(dd,1H)、8.325(d,1H)、8.60(d,1H) 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 , TMS, ppm) δ: 1.16 (t, 3H), 2.41 (s, 3H), 2.89 (t, 2H), 4.09 (q, 2H) ), 4.69 (t, 2H), 7.475-7.63 (m, 5H), 7.85 (dd, 1H), 8.045 (dd, 2H), 8.07 (dd, 1H) 8.325 (d, 1H), 8.60 (d, 1H)
(工程4)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
 化合物(iii)0.60g(1.4mmol)をt-ブチルメチルエーテル7mlに溶解させ、アセチルクロリド0.11g(1.4mmol)添加し、氷浴で冷却しながらトリエチルアミン0.28ml(2.0mmol)を滴下した。徐々に室温に戻しながら3時間攪拌した。反応終了後、氷水に反応混合液を投入し、酢酸エチルで抽出した後、水、飽和炭酸水素ナトリウム水溶液、飽和食塩水で洗浄し、硫酸マグネシウムで乾燥してから溶媒を留去した。シリカゲルカラムクロマトグラフィー(溶出液;ジクロロメタン→ノルマルヘキサン:酢酸エチル=2:1)により生成物を単離し、淡黄色固体の化合物(iv)0.30g(収率70%)を得た。該化合物(iv)の物性を以下に示す。
(Process 4)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
0.60 g (1.4 mmol) of compound (iii) is dissolved in 7 ml of t-butyl methyl ether, 0.11 g (1.4 mmol) of acetyl chloride is added, and 0.28 ml (2.0 mmol) of triethylamine is added while cooling in an ice bath. ) Was added dropwise. The mixture was stirred for 3 hours while gradually returning to room temperature. After completion of the reaction, the reaction mixture was poured into ice water, extracted with ethyl acetate, washed with water, saturated aqueous sodium hydrogen carbonate solution and saturated brine, dried over magnesium sulfate, and then the solvent was distilled off. The product was isolated by silica gel column chromatography (eluent: dichloromethane → normal hexane: ethyl acetate = 2: 1) to obtain 0.30 g (yield 70%) of a light yellow solid compound (iv). The physical properties of the compound (iv) are shown below.
 1H-NMR(400MHz,CDCl3,TMS,ppm)δ:1.16(t,3H)、2.23(s,3H)、2.51(s,3H)、2.90(t,2H)、4.09(q,2H)、4.71(t,2H)、7.51-7.62(m,5H)、7.75(dd,2H)、7.99(dd,1H)、8.09(dd,1H)、8.46(d,1H)、8.59(d,1H)
 UVスペクトル(移動層;アセトニトリル):λmax=260、292、333nm
 熱分解温度(窒素ガス雰囲気下、1.5mgのサンプルを昇温速度10℃/分で加熱し、5%質量減少した時の温度):224.5℃
 分子量:470.52
1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 , TMS, ppm) δ: 1.16 (t, 3H), 2.23 (s, 3H), 2.51 (s, 3H), 2.90 (t, 2H) ), 4.09 (q, 2H), 4.71 (t, 2H), 7.51-7.62 (m, 5H), 7.75 (dd, 2H), 7.99 (dd, 1H) 8.09 (dd, 1H), 8.46 (d, 1H), 8.59 (d, 1H)
UV spectrum (moving layer; acetonitrile): λmax = 260, 292, 333 nm
Thermal decomposition temperature (temperature at which a 1.5 mg sample is heated at a heating rate of 10 ° C./min under a nitrogen gas atmosphere and the mass is reduced by 5%): 224.5 ° C.
Molecular weight: 470.52
<実施例2>
 実施例1の工程1において、エチルアクリレート(40mmol)の代わりにイソブチルアクリレート(40mmol)を用い、工程2において、ベンゾイルクロリド(11mmol)の代わりに2-メチルベンゾイルクロリド(11mmol)を用いたこと以外は実施例1と同様に操作を行い、下記の淡黄色固体の化合物(v)を得た。該化合物(v)の物性を以下に示す。
<Example 2>
Example 1 except that isobutyl acrylate (40 mmol) was used instead of ethyl acrylate (40 mmol) in Step 1 of Example 1, and 2-methylbenzoyl chloride (11 mmol) was used instead of benzoyl chloride (11 mmol) in Step 2. The same operation as in Example 1 was performed to obtain the following pale yellow solid compound (v). The physical properties of the compound (v) are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059
 1H-NMR(400MHz,CDCl3,TMS,ppm)δ:0.81(d、6H)、1.805(m、1H)、2.29(s、3H)、2.35(s、3H)、2.50(s、3H)、2.90(t、2H)、3.81(d、2H)、4.70(t、2H)、7.28-7.53(m、6H)、7.97(dd、1H)、8.10(dd、1H)、8.42(d、1H)、8.51(d、1H)
 UVスペクトル(移動層;アセトニトリル):λmax=260、295.5、334nm
 熱分解温度(窒素ガス雰囲気下、1.5mgのサンプルを昇温速度10℃/分で加熱し、5%質量減少した時の温度):236℃
 分子量:512.6
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059
1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 , TMS, ppm) δ: 0.81 (d, 6H), 1.805 (m, 1H), 2.29 (s, 3H), 2.35 (s, 3H) ), 2.50 (s, 3H), 2.90 (t, 2H), 3.81 (d, 2H), 4.70 (t, 2H), 7.28-7.53 (m, 6H) 7.97 (dd, 1H), 8.10 (dd, 1H), 8.42 (d, 1H), 8.51 (d, 1H)
UV spectrum (moving layer; acetonitrile): λmax = 260, 295.5, 334 nm
Thermal decomposition temperature (temperature at which a 1.5 mg sample was heated at a heating rate of 10 ° C./min under a nitrogen gas atmosphere and the mass decreased by 5%): 236 ° C.
Molecular weight: 512.6
<実施例3>
 実施例1の工程1において、エチルアクリレート(40mmol)の代わりに2-メトキシエチルアクリレート(40mmol)を用い、工程2において、ベンゾイルクロリド(11mmol)の代わりに2-メチルベンゾイルクロリド(11mmol)を用いたこと以外は実施例1と同様に操作を行い、下記の淡黄色固体の化合物(vi)を得た。該化合物(vi)の物性を以下に示す。
<Example 3>
In Step 1 of Example 1, 2-methoxyethyl acrylate (40 mmol) was used instead of ethyl acrylate (40 mmol), and in Step 2, 2-methylbenzoyl chloride (11 mmol) was used instead of benzoyl chloride (11 mmol). Except for this, the same operation as in Example 1 was carried out to obtain the following pale yellow solid compound (vi). The physical properties of the compound (vi) are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000060
 1H-NMR(400MHz,CDCl3,TMS,ppm)δ:2.29(s、3H)、2.35(s、3H)、2.50(s、3H)、2.95(t、2H)、3.32(s、3H)、3.50(t、2H)、4.19(t、2H)、4.70(t、2H)、7.30-7.54(m、6H)、7.97(dd、1H)、8.10(dd、1H)、8.42(d、1H)、8.51(d、1H)
 UVスペクトル(移動層;アセトニトリル):λmax=258.5、296、334.5nm
 熱分解温度(窒素ガス雰囲気下、1.5mgのサンプルを昇温速度10℃/分で加熱し、5%質量減少した時の温度):243℃
 分子量:514.57
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000060
1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 , TMS, ppm) δ: 2.29 (s, 3H), 2.35 (s, 3H), 2.50 (s, 3H), 2.95 (t, 2H ), 3.32 (s, 3H), 3.50 (t, 2H), 4.19 (t, 2H), 4.70 (t, 2H), 7.30-7.54 (m, 6H) 7.97 (dd, 1H), 8.10 (dd, 1H), 8.42 (d, 1H), 8.51 (d, 1H)
UV spectrum (moving layer; acetonitrile): λmax = 258.5, 296, 334.5 nm
Thermal decomposition temperature (temperature at which a 1.5 mg sample was heated at a heating rate of 10 ° C./min under a nitrogen gas atmosphere and the mass decreased by 5%): 243 ° C.
Molecular weight: 514.57
<実施例4>
(工程1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000061
 カルバゾール5.0g(30mmol)をジメチルホルムアミド(DMF)6mlに溶解させ、炭酸エチレン13.2g(150mmol)とジアザビシクロウンデセン(DBU)5.5ml(037mmol)を添加し、100℃で3時間加熱還流した。冷却後、水を投入し、酢酸エチルで抽出した後、水洗してから溶媒を留去した。
 次に、得られた濃縮物をアセトニトリル15mlで希釈し、そこへアセチルクロライド2g(23mmol)及びトリエチルアミン4ml(29mmol)を添加し、室温で3時間攪拌した。反応終了後、水を投入し、酢酸エチルで抽出した後、水で洗浄してから硫酸マグネシウムで乾燥させ、溶媒を留去することにより、淡黄色液体の上記化合物(vii)6.0g(収率80%)を得た。
<Example 4>
(Process 1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000061
Dissolve 5.0 g (30 mmol) of carbazole in 6 ml of dimethylformamide (DMF), add 13.2 g (150 mmol) of ethylene carbonate and 5.5 ml (037 mmol) of diazabicycloundecene (DBU) and add at 100 ° C. for 3 hours. Heated to reflux. After cooling, water was added, extracted with ethyl acetate, washed with water, and then the solvent was distilled off.
Next, the obtained concentrate was diluted with 15 ml of acetonitrile, 2 g (23 mmol) of acetyl chloride and 4 ml (29 mmol) of triethylamine were added thereto, and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours. After completion of the reaction, water was added, extracted with ethyl acetate, washed with water, dried over magnesium sulfate, and the solvent was distilled off to obtain 6.0 g (yield) of the above compound (vii) as a pale yellow liquid. 80%).
(工程2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000062
 化合物(vii)2.5g(9.9mmol)をジクロロメタン10mlに溶解させ、氷浴で冷却しながら塩化アルミニウム1.5gを20分かけて添加した。その後、ベンゾイルクロリド1.4g(10.0mmol)を滴下し、徐々に室温に戻してから1時間攪拌した。
 再び氷浴で冷却しながら塩化アルミニウム1.5gを20分かけて添加、そこへアセチルクロリド0.93g(11.8mmol)を添加し、徐々に室温に戻してから一時間攪拌した。
 反応終了後、氷水に反応溶液を投入し、酢酸エチルで抽出した後、水、飽和炭酸水素ナトリウム水溶液、及び飽和食塩水で洗浄し、硫酸マグネシウムで乾燥してから溶媒を留去した。
 シリカゲルカラムクロマトグラフィー(溶出液;ジクロロメタン→ノルマルヘキサン:酢酸エチル=2:1)により化合物を単離し、淡黄色固体の化合物(viii)2.8g(収率70%)を得た。
(Process 2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000062
Compound (vii) (2.5 g, 9.9 mmol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (10 ml), and aluminum chloride (1.5 g) was added over 20 minutes while cooling in an ice bath. Thereafter, 1.4 g (10.0 mmol) of benzoyl chloride was added dropwise, and after gradually returning to room temperature, the mixture was stirred for 1 hour.
While cooling in an ice bath again, 1.5 g of aluminum chloride was added over 20 minutes, 0.93 g (11.8 mmol) of acetyl chloride was added thereto, and the mixture was gradually returned to room temperature and stirred for 1 hour.
After completion of the reaction, the reaction solution was poured into ice water, extracted with ethyl acetate, washed with water, saturated aqueous sodium hydrogen carbonate solution and saturated brine, dried over magnesium sulfate, and then the solvent was distilled off.
The compound was isolated by silica gel column chromatography (eluent: dichloromethane → normal hexane: ethyl acetate = 2: 1) to obtain 2.8 g (yield 70%) of a light yellow solid compound (viii).
(工程3)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000063
 塩化ヒドロキシルアミン0.38g(5.4mmol)、酢酸ナトリウム0.54g(6.4mmol)を水4.5mlに溶解させ、そこへ前記化合物(viii)2.0g(5.0mmol)及びエタノール35mlを添加し、2時間還流させた。
 反応終了後、反応溶液の溶媒を留去し、得られた固体を水で洗浄した後、THFに溶解させ、硫酸マグネシウムで乾燥し、溶媒を留去することにより、淡黄色液体の化合物(ix)1.8g(収率89%)を得た。
(Process 3)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000063
Hydroxylamine chloride (0.38 g, 5.4 mmol) and sodium acetate (0.54 g, 6.4 mmol) were dissolved in water (4.5 ml), and the compound (viii) (2.0 g, 5.0 mmol) and ethanol (35 ml) were added thereto. Added and refluxed for 2 hours.
After completion of the reaction, the solvent of the reaction solution was distilled off, and the resulting solid was washed with water, dissolved in THF, dried over magnesium sulfate, and the solvent was distilled off to obtain a compound (ix ) 1.8 g (yield 89%) was obtained.
(工程4)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000064
 化合物(ix)0.8g(2.0mmol)をt-ブチルメチルエーテル10mlに溶解させ、アセチルクロライド0.16g(2.0mmol)を添加し、氷浴で冷却しながらトリエチルアミン0.4ml(2.9mmol)を滴下した。徐々に室温に戻しながら3時間攪拌した。
 反応終了後、氷水に反応溶液を投入し、酢酸エチルで抽出した後、水、飽和炭酸水素ナトリウム水溶液、及び飽和食塩水で洗浄し、硫酸マグネシウムで乾燥してから溶媒を留去した。
 シリカゲルカラムクロマトグラフィー(溶出液;ジクロロメタン→ノルマルヘキサン:酢酸エチル=2:1)により化合物を単離し、下記物性の淡黄色固体の化合物(x)0.6g(収率70%)を得た。
(Process 4)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000064
Compound (ix) 0.8 g (2.0 mmol) was dissolved in t-butyl methyl ether 10 ml, acetyl chloride 0.16 g (2.0 mmol) was added, and triethylamine 0.4 ml (2. 9 mmol) was added dropwise. The mixture was stirred for 3 hours while gradually returning to room temperature.
After completion of the reaction, the reaction solution was poured into ice water, extracted with ethyl acetate, washed with water, saturated aqueous sodium hydrogen carbonate solution and saturated brine, dried over magnesium sulfate, and then the solvent was distilled off.
The compound was isolated by silica gel column chromatography (eluent: dichloromethane → normal hexane: ethyl acetate = 2: 1) to obtain 0.6 g (yield 70%) of a light yellow solid compound (x) having the following physical properties.
(化合物(x)の諸物性)
 1H-NMR(400MHz,CDCl3,TMS,ppm)δ:1.93(s,3H)、2.50(s,3H)、2.85(s,3H)、4.31(t,2H)、4.40(t,2H)、7.50-7.62(m,5H)、7.75(dd,2H)、7.99(dd,1H)、8.09(dd,1H)、8.46(d,1H)、8.59(d,1H)
 UVスペクトル(移動層;アセトニトリル):λmax=260、296、334nm
 熱分解温度(窒素ガス雰囲気下、1.5mgのサンプルを昇温速度10℃/分で加熱し、5%質量減少した時の温度):225℃
 分子量:456.49
(Physical properties of compound (x))
1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 , TMS, ppm) δ: 1.93 (s, 3H), 2.50 (s, 3H), 2.85 (s, 3H), 4.31 (t, 2H) ), 4.40 (t, 2H), 7.50-7.62 (m, 5H), 7.75 (dd, 2H), 7.99 (dd, 1H), 8.09 (dd, 1H) 8.46 (d, 1H), 8.59 (d, 1H)
UV spectrum (moving layer; acetonitrile): λmax = 260, 296, 334 nm
Thermal decomposition temperature (temperature at which a 1.5 mg sample is heated at a heating rate of 10 ° C./min under a nitrogen gas atmosphere and the mass is reduced by 5%): 225 ° C.
Molecular weight: 456.49
<実施例5>
(工程1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000065
 9-カルバゾール-9-プロピオン酸0.96g(40mmol)をアセトニトリル10mlで溶解した後、モルホリン18g(210mmol)を添加した。得られた混合液へ塩化チオニル14g(120mmol)を滴下し、室温で3時間攪拌した。
 反応終了後、水を添加してから30分攪拌した。その後、酢酸エチルで抽出し、水で洗浄した後、硫酸マグネシウムで乾燥してから溶媒を留去することにより、淡黄色液体の化合物(xi)10g(収率81%)を得た。
<Example 5>
(Process 1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000065
After 0.96 g (40 mmol) of 9-carbazole-9-propionic acid was dissolved in 10 ml of acetonitrile, 18 g (210 mmol) of morpholine was added. To the obtained mixture, 14 g (120 mmol) of thionyl chloride was added dropwise and stirred at room temperature for 3 hours.
After completion of the reaction, water was added and stirred for 30 minutes. Thereafter, the mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate, washed with water, dried over magnesium sulfate, and then the solvent was distilled off to obtain 10 g (yield 81%) of a light yellow liquid compound (xi).
(工程2~4)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000066
(Process 2-4)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000066
 上記化学反応式のとおり、実施例5の工程2~4では、実施例4の工程2~4において、工程2で化合物(vii)の代わりに化合物(xi)を用いたこと以外は同様の操作を採用することにより、下記物性の淡黄色固体の化合物(xii)を得た。 As shown in the above chemical reaction formula, the same operations were performed in steps 2 to 4 of Example 5 except that compound (xi) was used instead of compound (vii) in step 2 in steps 2 to 4 of Example 4. Was employed to obtain a light yellow solid compound (xii) having the following physical properties.
(化合物(xii)の諸物性)
 1H-NMR(400MHz,CDCl3,TMS,ppm)δ:2.50(s,3H)、2.80(t,2H)2.85(s,3H)、2.90(br,2H)、3.00(br,2H)、3.35(br,2H)、3.46(br,2H)4.72(t,2H)、7.51-7.62(m,5H)、7.75(dd,2H)、7.99(dd,1H)、8.09(dd,1H)、8.46(d,1H)、8.59(d,1H)
 UVスペクトル(移動層;アセトニトリル):λmax=260,292,335nm
 熱分解温度(窒素ガス雰囲気下、1.5mgのサンプルを昇温速度10℃/分で加熱し、5%質量減少した時の温度):234℃
 分子量:511.57
(Physical properties of compound (xii))
1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 , TMS, ppm) δ: 2.50 (s, 3H), 2.80 (t, 2H) 2.85 (s, 3H), 2.90 (br, 2H) 3.00 (br, 2H), 3.35 (br, 2H), 3.46 (br, 2H) 4.72 (t, 2H), 7.51-7.62 (m, 5H), 7 .75 (dd, 2H), 7.99 (dd, 1H), 8.09 (dd, 1H), 8.46 (d, 1H), 8.59 (d, 1H)
UV spectrum (moving layer; acetonitrile): λmax = 260,292,335 nm
Thermal decomposition temperature (temperature when a 1.5 mg sample is heated at a rate of temperature increase of 10 ° C./min under a nitrogen gas atmosphere and the mass is reduced by 5%): 234 ° C.
Molecular weight: 511.57
<試験例1~5、比較試験例1及び2>相溶性及び感度試験
 三官能アクリレート「M-305」(商品名、東亞合成(株)製)100質量部に、実施例1~5で得た光重合開始剤(化合物(iv)~(vi)、(x)及び(xii);試験例1~5用)、下記「IRGACURE OXE02」(チバ・スペシャルティ・ケミカルズ(株)製、比較試験例1用。以下、「OXE02」と略称することがある。)又は下記「N-1919」((株)ADEKA製、比較試験例2用)を5質量部添加した。ここで、目視により、得られた混合物中の固体の有無を確認し、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物(特に(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基を有する化合物)との相溶性の指標とした。結果を表1に示す。次いで、前記混合物をクロロホルムで溶解することにより、光硬化性組成物を調製した。
 得られた光硬化性組成物を各々、クロムをスパッタしたガラス基板上にスピンコートし塗布した。
 こうして得られた塗布膜にUVを露光しながら、赤外分光装置で810cm-1のピークの減少量を経時的に記録し、二重結合の消失がどの程度進行しているか(反応率)を確認し、感度の指標とした。結果を表1に示す。
<Test Examples 1 to 5 and Comparative Test Examples 1 and 2> Compatibility and Sensitivity Test Obtained in Examples 1 to 5 to 100 parts by mass of the trifunctional acrylate “M-305” (trade name, manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.) Photopolymerization initiator (compounds (iv) to (vi), (x) and (xii); for Test Examples 1 to 5), the following “IRGACURE OXE02” (manufactured by Ciba Specialty Chemicals Co., Ltd., comparative test example) 1) (hereinafter may be abbreviated as “OXE02”) or 5 parts by mass of the following “N-1919” (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation, for Comparative Test Example 2). Here, the presence or absence of a solid in the obtained mixture was confirmed by visual observation, and used as an index of compatibility with a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond (particularly a compound having a (meth) acryloyloxy group). The results are shown in Table 1. Next, a photocurable composition was prepared by dissolving the mixture in chloroform.
Each of the obtained photocurable compositions was spin-coated on a chromium-sputtered glass substrate and applied.
While the coating film thus obtained was exposed to UV, the amount of decrease in the peak at 810 cm −1 was recorded over time with an infrared spectrometer, and the extent of disappearance of the double bond (reaction rate) was recorded. Confirmed and used as an index of sensitivity. The results are shown in Table 1.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000067
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000067
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000068
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000068
 表1より、本発明の光重合開始剤は、エチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する化合物、特に多官能(メタ)アクリレートとの相溶性が高く、無溶剤の光重合開始剤を調製することも可能である。同時に、本発明の光重合開始剤を含有する光硬化性組成物は、従来の光重合開始剤を含有する光硬化性組成物に比べて、より高感度であることが分かる。 From Table 1, the photopolymerization initiator of the present invention is highly compatible with a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond, particularly a polyfunctional (meth) acrylate, and can also be used to prepare a solvent-free photopolymerization initiator. Is possible. At the same time, it can be seen that the photocurable composition containing the photopolymerization initiator of the present invention is more sensitive than the conventional photocurable composition containing the photopolymerization initiator.
<試験例6~10、比較試験例3及び4>溶剤に対する溶解性試験
 プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)、メタノール、3-メトキシ-3-メチル-1-ブチルアセテート(MMBA)、メチルイソブチルケトン(MIBK)、クロロホルムそれぞれ100質量部に対する光重合開始剤の溶解量を調査し、下記評価基準に従って溶解性を評価した。結果を表2に示す。
 A:10質量部以上溶解した。
 B:5質量部以上、10質量部未満の範囲で溶解した。
 C:2質量部以上、5質量部未満の範囲で溶解した。
 D:2質量部未満しか溶解しなかった。
 ここで、「溶解した」とは、目視により固体が見えない状態を指す。
<Test Examples 6 to 10, Comparative Test Examples 3 and 4> Solvent solubility test Propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate (PGMEA), methanol, 3-methoxy-3-methyl-1-butyl acetate (MMBA), methyl isobutyl ketone The amount of photopolymerization initiator dissolved in 100 parts by mass of (MIBK) and chloroform was investigated, and the solubility was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria. The results are shown in Table 2.
A: 10 parts by mass or more dissolved.
B: Dissolved in the range of 5 parts by mass or more and less than 10 parts by mass.
C: Dissolved in the range of 2 parts by mass or more and less than 5 parts by mass.
D: Only less than 2 parts by mass dissolved.
Here, “dissolved” refers to a state in which no solid is visible by visual inspection.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000069
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000069
 表2より、従来の光重合開始剤に比べ、本発明の光重合開始剤は、各種溶剤、特にエーテル結合及び/又はエステル結合を有する25℃で液体の化合物に対する溶解性に優れていることがわかる。
 また、比較試験例4で使用した光重合開始剤「N-1919」は、比較試験例3で使用した光重合開始剤「OXE02」に比べ、溶解性が高くなっている。これは、「N-1919」は、「OXE02」の構造に置換基を付与することによって溶解性を高めたものだからである。試験例6~10で使用した化合物(iv)~(vi)、(x)及び(xii)は、この「N-1919」よりも溶剤への溶解性が高いのみならず、分子量も小さくなっており、光硬化性組成物中における含有量を低減することができ、より一層優れた光重合開始剤である。
From Table 2, it can be seen that the photopolymerization initiator of the present invention is superior in solubility with respect to various solvents, in particular, a liquid compound at 25 ° C. having an ether bond and / or an ester bond, as compared with the conventional photopolymerization initiator. Recognize.
In addition, the photopolymerization initiator “N-1919” used in Comparative Test Example 4 has higher solubility than the photopolymerization initiator “OXE02” used in Comparative Test Example 3. This is because “N-1919” has improved solubility by adding a substituent to the structure of “OXE02”. The compounds (iv) to (vi), (x) and (xii) used in Test Examples 6 to 10 not only have higher solubility in the solvent than “N-1919”, but also have a smaller molecular weight. Thus, the content in the photocurable composition can be reduced, and the photopolymerization initiator is more excellent.
<製造例1>バインダー樹脂の製造
 ベンジルメタクリレート30質量部、スチレン38質量部、メタクリル酸18質量部及びt-ブチルパーオキシ-2-エチルヘキサノエート(日油(株)製の「パーブチルO」)10質量部の混合液を、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート150質量部を入れた重合槽中へ、窒素気流下、100℃で3時間かけて滴下した。滴下終了後、さらに100℃で3時間加熱し、重合体溶液を得た。
 得られた重合体溶液に、グリシジルメタクリレート14質量部、トリエチルアミン0.2質量部及びp-メトキシフェノール0.05質量部を添加し、110℃で10時間加熱することによりバインダー樹脂を調製した。
 得られたバインダー樹脂の固形分濃度は38質量%、酸価は75mgKOH/g、重量平均分子量は10,000であった。
<Production Example 1> Production of binder resin 30 parts by mass of benzyl methacrylate, 38 parts by mass of styrene, 18 parts by mass of methacrylic acid, and t-butylperoxy-2-ethylhexanoate ("Perbutyl O" manufactured by NOF Corporation) ) 10 parts by mass of the mixed solution was dropped into a polymerization tank containing 150 parts by mass of propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate at 100 ° C. for 3 hours under a nitrogen stream. After completion of dropping, the mixture was further heated at 100 ° C. for 3 hours to obtain a polymer solution.
To the obtained polymer solution, 14 parts by mass of glycidyl methacrylate, 0.2 part by mass of triethylamine and 0.05 part by mass of p-methoxyphenol were added and heated at 110 ° C. for 10 hours to prepare a binder resin.
The obtained binder resin had a solid content concentration of 38% by mass, an acid value of 75 mgKOH / g, and a weight average molecular weight of 10,000.
<製造例2>青色顔料分散液の調製
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000070
 表3に記載の各成分を各配合量で混合し、直径0.3mmジルコニアビーズを用いペイントシェーカー(浅田鉄工(株)製)で3時間分散させ、青色顔料分散液(固形分濃度:21質量%)を調製した。
<Production Example 2> Preparation of blue pigment dispersion
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000070
Each component shown in Table 3 was mixed in each blending amount, and dispersed with a paint shaker (manufactured by Asada Tekko Co., Ltd.) for 3 hours using zirconia beads having a diameter of 0.3 mm, and a blue pigment dispersion (solid content concentration: 21 mass) %) Was prepared.
<製造例3>赤色顔料分散液の調製
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000071
 表4に記載の各成分を各配合量で混合し、直径0.3mmジルコニアビーズを用いペイントシェーカー(浅田鉄工(株)製)で3時間分散させ、赤色顔料分散液(固形分濃度:21質量%)を調製した。
<Production Example 3> Preparation of red pigment dispersion
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000071
Each component shown in Table 4 was mixed in each compounding amount, and dispersed for 3 hours with a paint shaker (manufactured by Asada Tekko Co., Ltd.) using zirconia beads having a diameter of 0.3 mm, and a red pigment dispersion (solid content concentration: 21 mass). %) Was prepared.
<製造例4>緑色顔料分散液の調製
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000072
 表5に記載の各成分を各配合量で混合し、直径0.3mmジルコニアビーズを用いペイントシェーカー(浅田鉄工(株)製)で3時間分散させ、緑色顔料分散液(固形分濃度:21質量%)を調製した。
<Production Example 4> Preparation of green pigment dispersion
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000072
Each component shown in Table 5 was mixed in each compounding amount and dispersed for 3 hours with a paint shaker (manufactured by Asada Tekko Co., Ltd.) using zirconia beads having a diameter of 0.3 mm, and a green pigment dispersion (solid content concentration: 21 mass) %) Was prepared.
 以下の実施例において、感度、解像度、現像性及び密着性の評価を以下の通りに実施した。
(感度)
 露光工程において、露光量を100mJ/cm2又は200mJ/cm2とし、光が照射された領域の現像処理及びポストベーク後の膜厚が、露光前の膜厚100%に対して95%以上であった場合に「膜厚が十分」であるとし、下記評価基準に従って評価した。
 A:露光量100mJ/cm2であれば、十分な膜厚が得られた。
 B:露光量100mJ/cm2では不十分だが、露光量200mJ/cm2であれば十分な膜厚が得られた。
 なお、膜厚は、触針式膜厚測定器「SURFCORDER ET4000A」((株)小坂研究所製)を用いて測定した。
(解像度)
 下記評価基準に従って、解像度を評価した。
 a:露光現像時において、線幅10μm未満でも良好にパターンを得られた。
 b:線幅15~20μmであれば良好なパターンを得られた。
(現像性)
 露光時において、未露光部(光が照射されなかった部分)の残渣を観察し、下記評価基準に従って、現像性を評価した。
 ○:残渣を全く確認できなかった。
 ×:残渣を確認できた。
(密着性)
 現像後に流されずに密着していた独立パターンの線幅を調査し、下記評価基準に従って、密着性を評価した。
 ◎:線幅を5μm以下としても、良好な孤立パターンが得られた。
 ○:線幅6~10μmとすれば、良好な孤立パターンを得られた。
In the following examples, evaluation of sensitivity, resolution, developability, and adhesion was performed as follows.
(sensitivity)
In the exposure step, the exposure amount is set to 100 mJ / cm 2 or 200 mJ / cm 2, and the film thickness after development and post-baking in the region irradiated with light is 95% or more with respect to 100% of the film thickness before exposure. In such a case, “the film thickness was sufficient” was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria.
A: A sufficient film thickness was obtained when the exposure amount was 100 mJ / cm 2 .
B: An exposure amount of 100 mJ / cm 2 was insufficient, but an exposure amount of 200 mJ / cm 2 provided a sufficient film thickness.
The film thickness was measured using a stylus-type film thickness measuring device “SURFCORDER ET4000A” (manufactured by Kosaka Laboratory Ltd.).
(resolution)
The resolution was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria.
a: A favorable pattern was obtained even when the line width was less than 10 μm during exposure and development.
b: A good pattern was obtained when the line width was 15 to 20 μm.
(Developability)
At the time of exposure, the residue of an unexposed part (part which was not irradiated with light) was observed, and developability was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria.
○: No residue was confirmed.
X: A residue was confirmed.
(Adhesion)
The line width of the independent pattern that was in close contact without being washed after development was investigated, and the adhesion was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria.
A: A good isolated pattern was obtained even when the line width was 5 μm or less.
○: When the line width is 6 to 10 μm, a good isolated pattern was obtained.
<実施例6>青色光硬化性樹脂組成物の調製及びパターン形成
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000073
 表6に記載の各成分を各配合量で混合し、ディゾルバーで1時間攪拌し、青色光硬化性樹脂組成物を調製した。
 得られた青色光硬化性樹脂組成物をガラス基板上にスピンコートし、80℃で3分間加熱することにより、青色光硬化樹脂組成物の塗膜を形成した。得られた塗膜を、所定線幅のマスクを通して、塗膜側から光源として高圧水銀灯にて露光した後、100倍に希釈したディスパーズH(ヘンケル社製)を用いてスプレー現像を行い、現像終了後、230℃で30分ポストベークし、パターンを形成した。
 感度、解像度、現像性及び密着性の評価結果を表9に示す。
<Example 6> Preparation and pattern formation of blue light curable resin composition
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000073
Each component described in Table 6 was mixed in each compounding amount and stirred for 1 hour with a dissolver to prepare a blue light curable resin composition.
The obtained blue light curable resin composition was spin coated on a glass substrate and heated at 80 ° C. for 3 minutes to form a coating film of the blue light curable resin composition. The obtained coating film is exposed with a high-pressure mercury lamp as a light source from the coating film side through a mask having a predetermined line width, and then spray development is performed using Disperse H (manufactured by Henkel) diluted 100 times. After the completion, post baking was performed at 230 ° C. for 30 minutes to form a pattern.
Table 9 shows the evaluation results of sensitivity, resolution, developability and adhesion.
<比較例1、2>青色光硬化性樹脂組成物の調製及びパターン形成
 実施例6において、実施例1で得た化合物(iv)の代わりに、前記「IRGACURE OXE02」(チバ・スペシャルティ・ケミカルズ(株)製)又は前記「N-1919」((株)ADEKA製)を用いたこと以外は同様にして青色光硬化性樹脂組成物を調製し、パターンを形成した。
 感度、解像度、現像性及び密着性の評価結果を表9に示す。
<Comparative Examples 1 and 2> Preparation and pattern formation of blue light curable resin composition In Example 6, instead of the compound (iv) obtained in Example 1, the “IRGACURE OXE02” (Ciba Specialty Chemicals ( Co., Ltd.) or “N-1919” (manufactured by ADEKA Co., Ltd.) was used in the same manner to prepare a blue light curable resin composition to form a pattern.
Table 9 shows the evaluation results of sensitivity, resolution, developability and adhesion.
<実施例7>赤色光硬化性樹脂組成物の調製及びパターン形成
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000074
 表7に記載の各成分を各配合量で混合し、ディゾルバーで1時間攪拌し、赤色光硬化性樹脂組成物を調製した。
 得られた赤色光硬化性樹脂組成物について、実施例6と同様の操作を行うことにより、パターンを形成した。
 感度、解像度、現像性及び密着性の評価結果を表9に示す。
<Example 7> Preparation of red light curable resin composition and pattern formation
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000074
Each component described in Table 7 was mixed at each blending amount and stirred for 1 hour with a dissolver to prepare a red photocurable resin composition.
About the obtained red photocurable resin composition, the pattern was formed by performing operation similar to Example 6. FIG.
Table 9 shows the evaluation results of sensitivity, resolution, developability and adhesion.
<比較例3、4>赤色光硬化性樹脂組成物の調製及びパターン形成
 実施例7において、実施例1で得た化合物(iv)の代わりに、前記「IRGACURE OXE02」(チバ・スペシャルティ・ケミカルズ(株)製)又は前記「N-1919」((株)ADEKA製)を用いたこと以外は同様にして赤色光硬化性樹脂組成物を調製し、パターンを形成した。
 感度、解像度、現像性及び密着性の評価結果を表9に示す。
<Comparative Examples 3 and 4> Preparation and pattern formation of red photocurable resin composition In Example 7, instead of the compound (iv) obtained in Example 1, the “IRGACURE OXE02” (Ciba Specialty Chemicals ( Co., Ltd.) or “N-1919” (manufactured by ADEKA Co., Ltd.) was used in the same manner to prepare a red photocurable resin composition to form a pattern.
Table 9 shows the evaluation results of sensitivity, resolution, developability and adhesion.
<実施例8>緑色光硬化性樹脂組成物の調製及びパターン形成
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000075
 表8に記載の各成分を各配合量で混合し、ディゾルバーで1時間攪拌し、緑色光硬化性樹脂組成物を調製した。
 得られた緑色光硬化性樹脂組成物について、実施例6と同様の操作を行うことにより、パターンを形成した。
 感度、解像度、現像性及び密着性の評価結果を表9に示す。
<Example 8> Preparation and pattern formation of green light curable resin composition
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000075
Each component shown in Table 8 was mixed in each compounding amount and stirred for 1 hour with a dissolver to prepare a green light curable resin composition.
About the obtained green light curable resin composition, the pattern was formed by performing operation similar to Example 6. FIG.
Table 9 shows the evaluation results of sensitivity, resolution, developability and adhesion.
<比較例5、6>緑色光硬化性樹脂組成物の調製及びパターン形成
 実施例8において、実施例1で得た化合物(iv)の代わりに、前記「IRGACURE OXE02」(チバ・スペシャルティ・ケミカルズ(株)製)又は前記「N-1919」((株)ADEKA製)を用いたこと以外は同様にして緑色光硬化性樹脂組成物を調製し、パターンを形成した。
 感度、解像度、現像性及び密着性の評価結果を表9に示す。
<Comparative Examples 5 and 6> Preparation and pattern formation of green light curable resin composition In Example 8, instead of the compound (iv) obtained in Example 1, the “IRGACURE OXE02” (Ciba Specialty Chemicals ( Co., Ltd.) or “N-1919” (manufactured by ADEKA Co., Ltd.) was used in the same manner to prepare a green light curable resin composition to form a pattern.
Table 9 shows the evaluation results of sensitivity, resolution, developability and adhesion.
<実施例9~11>
 実施例6~8それぞれにおいて、実施例1で得た化合物(iv)の代わりに、実施例2で得た化合物(v)を用いたこと以外は同様にして、青色光硬化性樹脂組成物、赤色光硬化性樹脂組成物及び緑色光硬化性樹脂組成物を調製し、パターンを形成した。
 感度、解像度、現像性及び密着性の評価結果を表9に示す。
<Examples 9 to 11>
In each of Examples 6 to 8, a blue light curable resin composition was prepared in the same manner except that the compound (v) obtained in Example 2 was used instead of the compound (iv) obtained in Example 1. A red light curable resin composition and a green light curable resin composition were prepared, and a pattern was formed.
Table 9 shows the evaluation results of sensitivity, resolution, developability and adhesion.
<実施例12~14>
 実施例6~8それぞれにおいて、実施例1で得た化合物(iv)の代わりに、実施例3で得た化合物(vi)を用いたこと以外は同様にして、青色光硬化性樹脂組成物、赤色光硬化性樹脂組成物及び緑色光硬化性樹脂組成物を調製し、パターンを形成した。
 感度、解像度、現像性及び密着性の評価結果を表9に示す。
<Examples 12 to 14>
In each of Examples 6 to 8, a blue light curable resin composition was prepared in the same manner except that the compound (vi) obtained in Example 3 was used instead of the compound (iv) obtained in Example 1. A red light curable resin composition and a green light curable resin composition were prepared, and a pattern was formed.
Table 9 shows the evaluation results of sensitivity, resolution, developability and adhesion.
<実施例15~17>
 実施例6~8それぞれにおいて、実施例1で得た化合物(iv)の代わりに、実施例4で得た化合物(x)を用いたこと以外は同様にして、青色光硬化性樹脂組成物、赤色光硬化性樹脂組成物及び緑色光硬化性樹脂組成物を調製し、パターンを形成した。
 感度、解像度、現像性及び密着性の評価結果を表9に示す。
<Examples 15 to 17>
In each of Examples 6 to 8, a blue light curable resin composition was prepared in the same manner except that the compound (x) obtained in Example 4 was used instead of the compound (iv) obtained in Example 1. A red light curable resin composition and a green light curable resin composition were prepared, and a pattern was formed.
Table 9 shows the evaluation results of sensitivity, resolution, developability and adhesion.
<実施例18~20>
 実施例6~8それぞれにおいて、実施例1で得た化合物(iv)の代わりに、実施例5で得た化合物(xii)を用いたこと以外は同様にして、青色光硬化性樹脂組成物、赤色光硬化性樹脂組成物及び緑色光硬化性樹脂組成物を調製し、パターンを形成した。
 感度、解像度、現像性及び密着性の評価結果を表9に示す。
<Examples 18 to 20>
In each of Examples 6 to 8, a blue light curable resin composition was prepared in the same manner except that the compound (xii) obtained in Example 5 was used instead of the compound (iv) obtained in Example 1. A red light curable resin composition and a green light curable resin composition were prepared, and a pattern was formed.
Table 9 shows the evaluation results of sensitivity, resolution, developability and adhesion.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000076
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000076
 表9より、本発明の光重合開始剤を含有する光硬化性組成物は、従来の光重合開始剤を含有する光硬化性組成物と同等の現像性を有し、また、感度、解像度及び密着性については、従来の光重合開始剤を含有する光硬化性組成物より優れていることがわかる。このことより、本発明の光重合開始剤を含有する光硬化性組成物は、深部硬化性に優れていると言える。 From Table 9, the photocurable composition containing the photopolymerization initiator of the present invention has developability equivalent to that of the conventional photocurable composition containing the photopolymerization initiator, and also has sensitivity, resolution and About adhesiveness, it turns out that it is superior to the photocurable composition containing the conventional photoinitiator. From this, it can be said that the photocurable composition containing the photoinitiator of this invention is excellent in deep part sclerosis | hardenability.
 本発明の光重合開始剤は、光(特に波長450nm以下の短波長の光)に対する感度が高いため、薄膜化することが可能であり、低コストで高品質のパターンを形成することができること、さらに、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物(特に(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基を有する化合物)との相溶性や溶剤に対する溶解性が高いことより、カラーフィルタ用光硬化性組成物に含有させる光重合開始剤、さらには高遮光性のブラックマトリックス用光硬化性組成物に含有させる光重合開始剤として有用である。 Since the photopolymerization initiator of the present invention has high sensitivity to light (especially light having a short wavelength of 450 nm or less), it can be thinned and can form a high-quality pattern at low cost. Furthermore, photopolymerization starts to be incorporated into the photocurable composition for color filters due to its high compatibility with compounds having ethylenically unsaturated bonds (especially compounds having (meth) acryloyloxy groups) and high solubility in solvents. It is useful as a photopolymerization initiator to be contained in a photo-curable composition for a black matrix having a high light-shielding property.
1  透明基板
2  遮光部
3  着色層
10 カラーフィルタ
20 対向基板
30 液晶層
40 液晶表示装置
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Transparent substrate 2 Light-shielding part 3 Colored layer 10 Color filter 20 Opposite substrate 30 Liquid crystal layer 40 Liquid crystal display device

Claims (23)

  1.  下記一般式(I)で表される光重合開始剤。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
    (式中、R1~R11は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~10のシクロアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数4~20のシクロアルケニル基、ヒドロキシル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルコキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニルオキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルカノイル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケノイル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基又は置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~14のヘテロ環基を示す。R3は、R4又はR5と一緒になって環を形成していてもよい。R4は、R5と一緒になって環を形成していてもよい。
     また、Arは、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基又は置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数5~14のヘテロアリール基を示す。
     Wは、単結合又は酸素原子を示す。Zは、単結合、酸素原子又は>NR3’(R3’は、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基を示すか、又はR3’はR3とつながって、窒素原子と共に環を形成している。)を示す。
     nは、1~10の整数を示す。nが2~10の整数の場合、複数のR4及びR5は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。)
    The photoinitiator represented by the following general formula (I).
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
    (Wherein R 1 to R 11 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted Or an unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 ring atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, a hydroxyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or Unsubstituted alkenyloxy group having 2-20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkanoyl group having 1-20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkenoyl group having 2-20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted ring carbon atoms 6 .R 3 that an aryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group ring atoms 3 to 14 of to 14, to form a ring together with R 4 or R 5 Good .R 4 may form a ring together with R 5.
    Ar represents a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms or a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl group having 5 to 14 ring atoms.
    W represents a single bond or an oxygen atom. Z represents a single bond, an oxygen atom, or> NR 3 ′ (R 3 ′ represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or R 3 ′ is connected to R 3 together with a nitrogen atom. Forming a ring).
    n represents an integer of 1 to 10. When n is an integer of 2 to 10, the plurality of R 4 and R 5 may be the same or different. )
  2.  下記一般式(I-a)で表される、請求項1に記載の光重合開始剤。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
    (式中、R1~R11は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~10のシクロアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数4~20のシクロアルケニル基、ヒドロキシル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルコキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニルオキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルカノイル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケノイル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基又は置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~14のヘテロ環基を示す。R3は、R4又はR5と一緒になって環を形成していてもよい。R4は、R5と一緒になって環を形成していてもよい。
     また、Arは、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基又は置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数5~14のヘテロアリール基を示す。
     nは、1~10の整数を示す。nが2~10の整数の場合、複数のR4及びR5は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。)
    The photopolymerization initiator according to claim 1, which is represented by the following general formula (Ia):
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
    (Wherein R 1 to R 11 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted Or an unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 ring atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, a hydroxyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or Unsubstituted alkenyloxy group having 2-20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkanoyl group having 1-20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkenoyl group having 2-20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted ring carbon atoms 6 .R 3 that an aryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group ring atoms 3 to 14 of to 14, to form a ring together with R 4 or R 5 Good .R 4 may form a ring together with R 5.
    Ar represents a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms or a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl group having 5 to 14 ring atoms.
    n represents an integer of 1 to 10. When n is an integer of 2 to 10, the plurality of R 4 and R 5 may be the same or different. )
  3.  前記一般式(I-a)中、R1、R2及びR3が、それぞれ独立に、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、nが2であり、複数のR4及びR5が、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、Arが、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基である、請求項2に記載の光重合開始剤。 In the general formula (Ia), R 1 , R 2 and R 3 are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, n is 2, and a plurality of R 4 And R 5 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and Ar is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms. Item 3. The photopolymerization initiator according to Item 2.
  4.  前記一般式(I-a)中、R1、R2及びR3が、それぞれ独立に、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、nが2であり、複数のR4及びR5が、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、Arが、置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数5~14のヘテロアリール基である、請求項2に記載の光重合開始剤。 In the general formula (Ia), R 1 , R 2 and R 3 are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, n is 2, and a plurality of R 4 And R 5 is each independently a hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and Ar is a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl group having 5 to 14 ring atoms. The photopolymerization initiator according to claim 2.
  5.  分子量が515以下である、請求項3又は4に記載の光重合開始剤。 The photopolymerization initiator according to claim 3 or 4, having a molecular weight of 515 or less.
  6.  前記一般式(I-a)中、R1及びR2が、それぞれ独立に、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、R3が置換もしくは無置換の炭素数3~18のシクロアルキル基であり、nが2であり、複数のR4及びR5が、それぞれ独立に水素原子もしくは置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基である、請求項2に記載の光重合開始剤。 In the general formula (Ia), R 1 and R 2 are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and R 3 is a substituted or unsubstituted carbon number 3 to 18 The cycloalkyl group according to claim 2, wherein n is 2, and the plurality of R 4 and R 5 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. Photopolymerization initiator.
  7.  前記一般式(I-a)中、R1及びR2が、それぞれ独立に、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、R3が環形成原子数3~6の環状エーテル基で置換された炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、nが2であり、複数のR4及びR5が、それぞれ独立に水素原子もしくは置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基である、請求項2に記載の光重合開始剤。 In the general formula (Ia), R 1 and R 2 are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and R 3 is a cyclic ether having 3 to 6 ring atoms. An alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms substituted with a group, n is 2, and a plurality of R 4 and R 5 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. The photopolymerization initiator according to claim 2, wherein
  8.  分子量が550以下である、請求項6又は7に記載の光重合開始剤。 The photopolymerization initiator according to claim 6 or 7, wherein the molecular weight is 550 or less.
  9.  下記一般式(I-b)で表される、請求項1に記載の光重合開始剤。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
    (式中、R1~R11は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~10のシクロアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数4~20のシクロアルケニル基、ヒドロキシル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルコキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニルオキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルカノイル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケノイル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基又は置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~14のヘテロ環基を示す。
     Arは、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基又は置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数5~14のヘテロアリール基を示す。
     Wは、単結合又は酸素原子を示す。Zは、単結合、酸素原子又は>NR3’(R3’は、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基を示すか、又はR3’はR3とつながって、窒素原子と共に環を形成している。)を示す。)
    The photopolymerization initiator according to claim 1, which is represented by the following general formula (Ib).
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
    (Wherein R 1 to R 11 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted Or an unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 ring atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, a hydroxyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or Unsubstituted alkenyloxy group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkanoyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkenoyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted ring forming carbon number A 6 to 14 aryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 3 to 14 ring atoms is shown.
    Ar represents a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms or a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl group having 5 to 14 ring atoms.
    W represents a single bond or an oxygen atom. Z represents a single bond, an oxygen atom, or> NR 3 ′ (R 3 ′ represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or R 3 ′ is connected to R 3 together with a nitrogen atom. Forming a ring). )
  10.  前記一般式(I-b)中、R1及びR3が、それぞれ独立に、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、Wが酸素原子であり、Zが単結合又は酸素原子であり、Arが、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基である、請求項9に記載の光重合開始剤。 In the general formula (Ib), R 1 and R 3 are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, W is an oxygen atom, and Z is a single bond or oxygen The photopolymerization initiator according to claim 9, wherein the photopolymerization initiator is an atom, and Ar is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms.
  11.  さらに、R2が、-OCOR13(R13は、炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基を示す。)又は-COOR20(R20は、炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基を示す。)で表されるエステル基を有する炭素数1~20のアルキル基である、請求項10に記載の光重合開始剤。 Further, R 2 represents —OCOR 13 (R 13 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms) or —COOR 20 (R 20 represents 1 to 20 carbon atoms). The photopolymerization initiator according to claim 10, which is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms having an ester group represented by: 20 alkyl group or aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms.
  12.  前記一般式(I-b)中、R1及びR3が、それぞれ独立に、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、Wが単結合であり、Zが>NR3’(R3’は、前記定義のとおりである。)であり、Arが、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基である、請求項9に記載の光重合開始剤。 In the general formula (Ib), R 1 and R 3 are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, W is a single bond, and Z is> NR 3 ′. The photopolymerization initiator according to claim 9, wherein R 3 'is as defined above, and Ar is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms.
  13.  さらに、R2が、-OCOR13(R13は、炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基を示す。)又は-COOR20(R20は、炭素数1~20のアルキル基又は環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基を示す。)で表されるエステル基を有する炭素数1~20のアルキル基である、請求項12に記載の光重合開始剤。 Further, R 2 represents —OCOR 13 (R 13 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms) or —COOR 20 (R 20 represents 1 to 20 carbon atoms). The photopolymerization initiator according to claim 12, which is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms having an ester group represented by: 20 alkyl group or aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms.
  14.  バインダー樹脂及び/又はエチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物と、請求項1~13のいずれかに記載の光重合開始剤を含有する光硬化性組成物。 A photocurable composition comprising a binder resin and / or a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond and the photopolymerization initiator according to any one of claims 1 to 13.
  15.  光重合開始剤の含有量が、光硬化性組成物の固形分に対して2~50質量%である、請求項14に記載の光硬化性組成物。 The photocurable composition according to claim 14, wherein the content of the photopolymerization initiator is 2 to 50% by mass with respect to the solid content of the photocurable composition.
  16.  さらに色材を含有する、請求項14又は15に記載の光硬化性組成物。 The photocurable composition according to claim 14 or 15, further comprising a coloring material.
  17.  さらに、エーテル結合及び/又はエステル結合を有する25℃で液体の化合物を光重合開始剤1質量部に対して5~100質量部含有する、請求項14~16のいずれかに記載の光硬化性組成物。 The photocurable composition according to any one of claims 14 to 16, further comprising 5 to 100 parts by mass of a compound having an ether bond and / or an ester bond at 25 ° C and 1 part by mass of the photopolymerization initiator. Composition.
  18.  エチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物として、エーテル結合及び/又はエステル結合を持つエチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物を少なくとも1種用い、溶剤を光硬化性組成物全量の10質量%以下のみ含有する、請求項14~16のいずれかに記載の光硬化性組成物。 As the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, at least one compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond having an ether bond and / or an ester bond is used, and the solvent contains only 10% by mass or less of the total amount of the photocurable composition. The photocurable composition according to any one of claims 14 to 16.
  19.  カラーフィルタ用である、請求項16~18のいずれかに記載の光硬化性組成物。 The photocurable composition according to any one of claims 16 to 18, which is used for a color filter.
  20.  請求項16~18のいずれかに記載の光硬化性組成物を用いたカラーフィルタ。 A color filter using the photocurable composition according to any one of claims 16 to 18.
  21.  請求項20に記載のカラーフィルタと対向基板と、前記カラーフィルタと前記対向基板との間に形成された液晶層とを有する液晶表示装置。 21. A liquid crystal display device comprising: the color filter according to claim 20; a counter substrate; and a liquid crystal layer formed between the color filter and the counter substrate.
  22.  請求項16~18のいずれかに記載の光硬化性組成物を基板に塗布し、乾燥した後、フォトマスクを用いて露光し、次いで現像を行うことによる、パターン形成方法。 A pattern forming method comprising applying the photocurable composition according to any one of claims 16 to 18 to a substrate, drying the substrate, exposing the substrate to light using a photomask, and then performing development.
  23.  下記一般式(1)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
    (式中、R6~R11は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~10のシクロアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数4~20のシクロアルケニル基、ヒドロキシル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルコキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニルオキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルカノイル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケノイル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基又は置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~14のヘテロ環基を示す。)
    で表されるカルバゾール誘導体と、下記一般式(2a)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
    (式中、R3、R4’及びR5’は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~10のシクロアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数4~20のシクロアルケニル基、ヒドロキシル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルコキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニルオキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルカノイル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケノイル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基又は置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~14のヘテロ環基を示す。R3は、R5'と一緒になって環を形成していてもよい。)
    で表されるアクリレート誘導体とを塩基の存在下に反応させることにより、下記一般式(3a’)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
    (式中、R3、R4’、R5’、R6~R11は、前記定義の通りである。)
    で表されるカルボニルアルキル基導入体を得、得られたカルボニルアルキル基導入体と下記一般式(4)、(5)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
    (式中、Xは、ハロゲン原子又は-OC(=O)Arを示し、X’は、ハロゲン原子又は-OC(=O)R2を示す。
     Arは、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基又は置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数5~14のヘテロアリール基を示す。
     R2は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~10のシクロアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数4~20のシクロアルケニル基、ヒドロキシル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルコキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニルオキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルカノイル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケノイル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基又は置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~14のヘテロ環基を示す。)
    で表される2つのアシル化剤をルイス酸の存在下に反応させることにより、下記一般式(6a’)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
    (式中、R2、R3、R4’、R5’、R6~R11及びArは、前記定義の通りである。)
    で表されるジケトン体を得、得られたジケトン体とヒドロキシルアミンを反応させることにより、下記一般式(7a’)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
    (式中、R2、R3、R4’、R5’、R6~R11及びArは、前記定義の通りである。)
    で表されるオキシム体を得、得られたオキシム体と下記一般式(8)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
    (式中、Yは、ハロゲン原子又は-OC(=O)R1を示す。
     また、R1は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~10のシクロアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数4~20のシクロアルケニル基、ヒドロキシル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルコキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケニルオキシ基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数1~20のアルカノイル基、置換もしくは無置換の炭素数2~20のアルケノイル基、置換もしくは無置換の環形成炭素数6~14のアリール基又は置換もしくは無置換の環形成原子数3~14のヘテロ環基を示す。)
    で表されるエステル化剤とを反応させることによる、下記一般式(I-a1)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
    (式中、R1~R3、R4’、R5’、R6~R11及びArは、前記定義の通りである。)
    で表される光重合開始剤の製造方法。
    The following general formula (1)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
    (Wherein R 6 to R 11 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted Or an unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 ring atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, a hydroxyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or Unsubstituted alkenyloxy group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkanoyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkenoyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted ring forming carbon number Represents a 6 to 14 aryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 3 to 14 ring atoms.)
    A carbazole derivative represented by the following general formula (2a)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
    Wherein R 3 , R 4 ′ and R 5 ′ are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted carbon number 2 to 20 Alkenyl group, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 ring atoms, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, hydroxyl group, substituted or unsubstituted 1 to 20 carbon atoms Alkoxy group, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyloxy group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkanoyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkenoyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted Or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 3 to 14 ring atoms, and R 3 together with R 5 ′ forms a ring. May be.)
    Is reacted with an acrylate derivative represented by the following general formula (3a ′):
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
    (Wherein R 3 , R 4 ′, R 5 ′ and R 6 to R 11 are as defined above.)
    A carbonylalkyl group-introduced product represented by the following general formula (4), (5)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
    (Wherein X represents a halogen atom or —OC (═O) Ar, and X ′ represents a halogen atom or —OC (═O) R 2 .
    Ar represents a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms or a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl group having 5 to 14 ring atoms.
    R 2 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted ring atom having 3 to 10 ring atoms. A cycloalkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, a hydroxyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyloxy having 2 to 20 carbon atoms Group, substituted or unsubstituted alkanoyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkenoyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms, or substituted or unsubstituted And a heterocyclic group having 3 to 14 ring atoms. )
    Is reacted in the presence of a Lewis acid to give the following general formula (6a ′):
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
    (Wherein R 2 , R 3 , R 4 ′, R 5 ′, R 6 to R 11 and Ar are as defined above.)
    A diketone product represented by the following general formula (7a ′) is obtained by reacting the resulting diketone product with hydroxylamine.
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
    (Wherein R 2 , R 3 , R 4 ′, R 5 ′, R 6 to R 11 and Ar are as defined above.)
    The oxime body represented by the following formula (8)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
    Wherein Y represents a halogen atom or —OC (═O) R 1 .
    R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atom number of 3 -10 cycloalkyl group, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, hydroxyl group, substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted 2 to 20 carbon atoms An alkenyloxy group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkanoyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenoyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 14 ring carbon atoms, An unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 3 to 14 ring atoms is shown. )
    By reacting with an esterifying agent represented by the following general formula (I-a1)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
    (Wherein R 1 to R 3 , R 4 ′, R 5 ′, R 6 to R 11 and Ar are as defined above.)
    The manufacturing method of the photoinitiator represented by these.
PCT/JP2011/054193 2010-02-25 2011-02-24 Photopolymerization initiator, photocurable composition, pattern formation method, colour filter, lcd device, and manufacturing method for photopolymerization initiator WO2011105518A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2012501867A JP5626332B2 (en) 2010-02-25 2011-02-24 Photopolymerization initiator, photocurable composition, pattern forming method, color filter, liquid crystal display device, and method for producing photopolymerization initiator

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2010-040739 2010-02-25
JP2010040739 2010-02-25
JP2010-214536 2010-09-24
JP2010214536 2010-09-24
JP2010-219974 2010-09-29
JP2010219974 2010-09-29

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2011105518A1 true WO2011105518A1 (en) 2011-09-01

Family

ID=44506920

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2011/054193 WO2011105518A1 (en) 2010-02-25 2011-02-24 Photopolymerization initiator, photocurable composition, pattern formation method, colour filter, lcd device, and manufacturing method for photopolymerization initiator

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (2) JP5626332B2 (en)
TW (1) TWI501035B (en)
WO (1) WO2011105518A1 (en)

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2012251128A (en) * 2010-02-25 2012-12-20 Dainippon Printing Co Ltd Photopolymerization initiator, photocurable composition, pattern forming method, color filter, liquid crystal display device and method for producing photopolymerization initiator
JP2013114184A (en) * 2011-11-30 2013-06-10 Dnp Fine Chemicals Co Ltd Colored resin composition, color filter, and liquid crystal display device
WO2015080503A1 (en) 2013-11-28 2015-06-04 Takoma Technology Co., Ltd. Photoinitiator and photosensitive composition including the same
JP2023026377A (en) * 2021-08-13 2023-02-24 達興材料股▲ふん▼有限公司 Photosensitive resin composition and apparatus using the same

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP6054798B2 (en) * 2013-03-29 2016-12-27 富士フイルム株式会社 Color filter manufacturing method, color filter, and solid-state imaging device
KR101865499B1 (en) 2017-02-14 2018-06-07 동우 화인켐 주식회사 Color Filter and Display Device

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2006162784A (en) * 2004-12-03 2006-06-22 Toppan Printing Co Ltd Photosensitive colored composition and color filter using the same
KR20090046108A (en) * 2007-11-05 2009-05-11 타코마테크놀러지 주식회사 Oxim ester compounds, photosensitive composition comprising the same and usage
JP2009221334A (en) * 2008-03-14 2009-10-01 Fujifilm Corp Photopolymerization initiator, polymerizable composition, polymerizable composition for color filter, color filter, method for producing it, and, solid-state imaging device

Family Cites Families (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2011105518A1 (en) * 2010-02-25 2011-09-01 大日本印刷株式会社 Photopolymerization initiator, photocurable composition, pattern formation method, colour filter, lcd device, and manufacturing method for photopolymerization initiator

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2006162784A (en) * 2004-12-03 2006-06-22 Toppan Printing Co Ltd Photosensitive colored composition and color filter using the same
KR20090046108A (en) * 2007-11-05 2009-05-11 타코마테크놀러지 주식회사 Oxim ester compounds, photosensitive composition comprising the same and usage
JP2009221334A (en) * 2008-03-14 2009-10-01 Fujifilm Corp Photopolymerization initiator, polymerizable composition, polymerizable composition for color filter, color filter, method for producing it, and, solid-state imaging device

Cited By (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2012251128A (en) * 2010-02-25 2012-12-20 Dainippon Printing Co Ltd Photopolymerization initiator, photocurable composition, pattern forming method, color filter, liquid crystal display device and method for producing photopolymerization initiator
JP2013114184A (en) * 2011-11-30 2013-06-10 Dnp Fine Chemicals Co Ltd Colored resin composition, color filter, and liquid crystal display device
WO2015080503A1 (en) 2013-11-28 2015-06-04 Takoma Technology Co., Ltd. Photoinitiator and photosensitive composition including the same
CN105899502A (en) * 2013-11-28 2016-08-24 塔科玛技术股份有限公司 Photoinitiator and photosensitive composition including the same
EP3057961A4 (en) * 2013-11-28 2017-08-23 Takoma Technology Co., Ltd. Photoinitiator and photosensitive composition including the same
JP2023026377A (en) * 2021-08-13 2023-02-24 達興材料股▲ふん▼有限公司 Photosensitive resin composition and apparatus using the same
JP7358583B2 (en) 2021-08-13 2023-10-10 達興材料股▲ふん▼有限公司 Photosensitive resin composition and equipment for applying it

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW201140240A (en) 2011-11-16
TWI501035B (en) 2015-09-21
JP5626332B2 (en) 2014-11-19
JP2012251128A (en) 2012-12-20
JPWO2011105518A1 (en) 2013-06-20
JP5477367B2 (en) 2014-04-23

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6513841B2 (en) Self-luminous photosensitive resin composition, color filter including color conversion layer using the same, and image display device
JP5477367B2 (en) Photopolymerization initiator, photocurable composition, pattern forming method, color filter, liquid crystal display device, and method for producing photopolymerization initiator
JP6778266B2 (en) An oxime ester compound having excellent heat stability, a photopolymerization initiator containing the same, and a photosensitive resin composition.
JP6380867B2 (en) COMPOUND, COLORING COMPOSITION CONTAINING THE SAME, AND RESIN COMPOSITION CONTAINING THE SAME
JP6741427B2 (en) Self-luminous photosensitive resin composition, display device including color conversion layer produced therefrom
TW201838968A (en) Fluorine oxime ester photoinitiator containing polymerisable group, method for preparing the same and the use thereof
JP2019086781A (en) Coloring photosensitive resin composition, color filter manufactured using the same, and display device including color filter
JP2014005466A (en) Alkali-soluble resin, photosensitive resin composition containing the same, and color filter using the same
TW201609619A (en) Novel polymerization initiator and radically polymerizable composition containing same
TW202014475A (en) Compound, colorant composition, photoresist, color filter and display device
KR20140104768A (en) Colored photosensitive resin composition comprising the same
TWI798206B (en) Oxime ester compound and photopolymerization initiator containing the same
JP2018169607A (en) Black photosensitive resin composition and display device manufactured by using the same
JP2018081302A (en) Coloring photosensitive resin composition, and color filter and image display device produced by using the same
JP7251984B2 (en) Self-luminous photosensitive resin composition, color conversion layer and display device manufactured using the same
JP6089748B2 (en) Colored composition, colored cured film, and display element
KR101840584B1 (en) Colored Photosensitive Resin Composition, Color Filter and Display Device
JP2014026278A (en) Colored photosensitive resin composition
JP2017181890A (en) Photosensitive composition for color filter, color filter substrate and method for producing the same, and display device prepared therewith
JP6996175B2 (en) Photosensitive composition for color filter and color filter substrate using it
JP2012072102A (en) Photopolymerization initiator, photocurable composition, color filter, liquid crystal display device, and method for forming pattern
JP7415697B2 (en) Colored composition, color filter substrate and display device using the same
WO2023021986A1 (en) Photosensitive composition, color filter substrate, fingerprint sensor, and display device
TWI761701B (en) Colorant composition, photoresist, color filter and display device
JP2017122204A (en) Coloring resin composition

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 11747478

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2012501867

Country of ref document: JP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 11747478

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1